]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texinfo
gas/
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
56dd11f0 3@c Copyright 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
3c3bdf30 29@set MMIX
2469cfa2 30@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
31@set POWERPC
32@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
33@set Renesas
34@set SPU
35@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 36@set WIN32
e0001a05 37@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
38@end ifset
39@c man end
40
9160ea82
AM
41@ifnottex
42@dircategory Software development
43@direntry
252b5132 44* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
45@end direntry
46@end ifnottex
252b5132 47
0e9517a9 48@copying
e49e529d
JM
49This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
50@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
51@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
52@end ifset
53version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 54
56dd11f0 55Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 56
cf055d54 57Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 58under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
59or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
60with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
61Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 62section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 63@end copying
252b5132
RH
64@iftex
65@finalout
66@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 67@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 68@titlepage
71ba23f6 69@title The GNU linker
252b5132 70@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
71@subtitle @code{ld}
72@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
73@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
74@end ifset
252b5132
RH
75@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
76@author Steve Chamberlain
77@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
78@page
79
80@tex
81{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
82\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
83\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 84\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
85\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
86}
87\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
88@end tex
89
90@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 91@c man begin COPYRIGHT
56dd11f0 92Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 93
0285c67d 94Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 95under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
96or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
97with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
98Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 99section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 100@c man end
252b5132 101
252b5132
RH
102@end titlepage
103@end iftex
4ecceb71 104@contents
252b5132
RH
105@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
106
84ec0e6d 107@ifnottex
252b5132 108@node Top
71ba23f6 109@top LD
e49e529d
JM
110This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
111@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
112@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
113@end ifset
114version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 115
cf055d54 116This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
117Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
118in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 119
252b5132
RH
120@menu
121* Overview:: Overview
122* Invocation:: Invocation
123* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
124@ifset GENERIC
125* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
126@end ifset
127@ifclear GENERIC
128@ifset H8300
129* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
130@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
131@ifset Renesas
132* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
133@end ifset
134@ifset I960
135* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
136@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
137@ifset ARM
138* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
139@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
140@ifset M68HC11
141* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
142@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
143@ifset HPPA
144* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
145@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
146@ifset M68K
147* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
148@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
149@ifset POWERPC
150* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
151@end ifset
152@ifset POWERPC64
153* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
154@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
155@ifset SPU
156* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
157@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
158@ifset TICOFF
159* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
160@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
161@ifset WIN32
162* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
163@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
164@ifset XTENSA
165* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
166@end ifset
252b5132
RH
167@end ifclear
168@ifclear SingleFormat
169* BFD:: BFD
170@end ifclear
171@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
172
173* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
174* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 175* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 176* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 177@end menu
84ec0e6d 178@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
179
180@node Overview
181@chapter Overview
182
183@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
184@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 185
0879a67a 186@ifset man
0285c67d 187@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 188ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
189@c man end
190
191@c man begin SEEALSO
192ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
193the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
194@file{ld}.
195@c man end
196@end ifset
197
198@c man begin DESCRIPTION
199
ff5dcc92 200@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 201their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 202compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 203
ff5dcc92 204@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
205a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
206to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
207
0285c67d
NC
208@ifset man
209@c For the man only
ece2d90e 210This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
211@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
212language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
213@end ifset
214
252b5132 215@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
216This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
217to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
218write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
219@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
220available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
221@end ifclear
222
223Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
224linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
225execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 226@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
227(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
228
0285c67d
NC
229@c man end
230
252b5132
RH
231@node Invocation
232@chapter Invocation
233
0285c67d
NC
234@c man begin DESCRIPTION
235
ff5dcc92 236The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
237and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
238you have many choices to control its behavior.
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man end
241
252b5132
RH
242@ifset UsesEnvVars
243@menu
244* Options:: Command Line Options
245* Environment:: Environment Variables
246@end menu
247
248@node Options
249@section Command Line Options
250@end ifset
251
252@cindex command line
253@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
254
255@c man begin OPTIONS
256
252b5132
RH
257The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
258practice few of them are used in any particular context.
259@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 260For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
261object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
262link a file @code{hello.o}:
263
264@smallexample
265ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
266@end smallexample
267
ff5dcc92 268This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
269result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
270the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
271directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
272
ff5dcc92 273Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
274point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
275as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
276which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
277files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
278different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
279occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
280option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
281noted in the descriptions below.
282
283@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
284Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
285together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
286options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
287an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
288
289Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
290specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
291and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
292are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
293message @samp{No input files}.
294
36f63dca 295If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
296assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
297augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
298linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
299permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
300or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
301@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
302script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
303extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
304to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
305the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
306
307For options whose names are a single letter,
308option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
309whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
310option that requires them.
311
312For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 313precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 314@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 315this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 316only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
317@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
318name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
319output.
320
321Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
322option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
323immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
324@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
325Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
326accepted.
252b5132 327
36f63dca
NC
328Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
329(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
330prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
331compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
332
333@smallexample
2509a395 334 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
335@end smallexample
336
337This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
338silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
339may also arise when passing options that require values through a
340driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
341a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
342and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
343the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
344
345@smallexample
346 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
347@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
348
349Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
350linker:
351
ff5dcc92 352@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 353@include at-file.texi
dff70155 354
2509a395
SL
355@kindex -a @var{keyword}
356@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
357This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
358argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
359@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
360@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
361to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
362
7ee314fa
AM
363@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
364@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
365Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
366@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
367specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
368will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
369finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 370it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 371This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 372interface.
7ee314fa 373
252b5132
RH
374@ifset I960
375@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
376@kindex -A @var{arch}
377@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
378@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
379@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
380In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
381Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
382@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
383the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 384archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
385family}, for details.
386
ff5dcc92 387Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
388other architecture families.
389@end ifset
390
391@ifclear SingleFormat
392@cindex binary input format
393@kindex -b @var{format}
394@kindex --format=@var{format}
395@cindex input format
396@cindex input format
397@item -b @var{input-format}
398@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
399@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
400file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 401@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 402that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 403configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 404to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
405default input format the most usual format on each machine.
406@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
407supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
408formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
409@xref{BFD}.
410
411You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
412binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
413linking object files of different formats), by including
414@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 415particular format.
252b5132
RH
416
417The default format is taken from the environment variable
418@code{GNUTARGET}.
419@ifset UsesEnvVars
420@xref{Environment}.
421@end ifset
422You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
423@code{TARGET};
424@ifclear man
425see @ref{Format Commands}.
426@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
427@end ifclear
428
429@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
430@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
431@cindex compatibility, MRI
432@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
433@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 434For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 435files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
436@ifclear man
437@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
438@end ifclear
439@ifset man
440the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
441@end ifset
442Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 443the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
444scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
445If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
446specified by any @samp{-L} options.
447
448@cindex common allocation
449@kindex -d
450@kindex -dc
451@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 452@item -d
252b5132
RH
453@itemx -dc
454@itemx -dp
455These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
456compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
457even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
458script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
459@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
460
7ee314fa
AM
461@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
462@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
463@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
464@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
465Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
466@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
467specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
468will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
469option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 470The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 471
252b5132
RH
472@cindex entry point, from command line
473@kindex -e @var{entry}
474@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 475@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
476@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
477Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
478program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
479named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
480and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
481base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
482@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
483and other ways of specifying the entry point.
484
b58f81ae
DJ
485@kindex --exclude-libs
486@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
487Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 488exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
489@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
490automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
491port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
492explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
493option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
494be treated as hidden.
495
e1c37eb5
DK
496@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
497@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
498Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
499should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
500into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
501may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
502used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
503the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
504match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
505command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
506of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
507regardless of this option.
508
252b5132
RH
509@cindex dynamic symbol table
510@kindex -E
511@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 512@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
513@item -E
514@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
515@itemx --no-export-dynamic
516When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
517option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
518all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
519set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
520
521If you do not use either of these options (or use the
522@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
523dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
524referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
525
526If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
527back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
528dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
529linking the program itself.
530
55255dae 531You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 532be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 533See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 534
8b747e1a
DK
535Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
536support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
537the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
538
36f63dca 539@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
540@cindex big-endian objects
541@cindex endianness
542@kindex -EB
543@item -EB
544Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
545
546@cindex little-endian objects
547@kindex -EL
548@item -EL
549Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 550@end ifclear
252b5132 551
2509a395
SL
552@kindex -f @var{name}
553@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
554@item -f @var{name}
555@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
556When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
557to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
558table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
559symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
560
561If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
562run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
563the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
564first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
565@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
566in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
567Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
568implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
569machine specific performance.
570
571This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
572will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
573
2509a395
SL
574@kindex -F @var{name}
575@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 576@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 577@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
578When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
579the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
580of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
581on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
582
583If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
584run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
585dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
586filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
587found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
588used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
589@var{name}.
590
ff5dcc92 591Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 592toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
593object files.
594@ifclear SingleFormat
595The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 596@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 597@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
598environment variable.
599@end ifclear
600The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
601creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 602
3dbf70a2 603@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
604@kindex -fini=@var{name}
605@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
606When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
607executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
608address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
609the function to call.
610
252b5132
RH
611@kindex -g
612@item -g
613Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
614
2509a395
SL
615@kindex -G @var{value}
616@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 617@cindex object size
2509a395 618@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
619@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
620Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
621@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
622MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
623sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
624
625@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 626@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 627@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 628@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
629@itemx -soname=@var{name}
630When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
631the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
632which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
633linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
634field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
635
636@kindex -i
637@cindex incremental link
638@item -i
639Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
640
3dbf70a2 641@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
642@kindex -init=@var{name}
643@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
644When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
645executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
646of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
647function to call.
648
252b5132 649@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 650@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 651@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 652@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
653@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
654Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
655list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
656If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 657will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 658will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 659
ff5dcc92 660On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
661files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
662and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
663called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
664@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
665indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
666to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
667@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
668
669The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
670specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
671was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
672command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
673archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
674the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
675
ff5dcc92 676See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
677archives multiple times.
678
679You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
680
681@ifset GENERIC
682This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 683if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
684behaviour of the AIX linker.
685@end ifset
686
687@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 688@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 689@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 690@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 691@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
692Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
693for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
694option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
695in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
696on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 697@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
698order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
699how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
700option is specified.
252b5132 701
9c8ebd6a
DJ
702If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
703by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
704
252b5132
RH
705@ifset UsesEnvVars
706The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 707@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
708some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
709@end ifset
710
711The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
712@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
713at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
714
715@cindex emulation
716@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 717@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
718Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
719emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
720
721If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
722@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
723
724Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
725configured.
726
727@cindex link map
728@kindex -M
729@kindex --print-map
730@item -M
731@itemx --print-map
732Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
733information about the link, including the following:
734
735@itemize @bullet
736@item
3b83e13a 737Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
738@item
739How common symbols are allocated.
740@item
741All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
742which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
743@item
744The values assigned to symbols.
745
746Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
747involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
748have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
749linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
750of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
751the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
752linker script containing:
753
754@smallexample
755 foo = 1
756 foo = foo * 4
757 foo = foo + 8
758@end smallexample
759
760will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
761option is used:
762
763@smallexample
764 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
765 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
766 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
767@end smallexample
768
769See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
770scripts.
252b5132
RH
771@end itemize
772
773@kindex -n
774@cindex read-only text
775@cindex NMAGIC
776@kindex --nmagic
777@item -n
778@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
779Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
780libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
781mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
782
783@kindex -N
784@kindex --omagic
785@cindex read/write from cmd line
786@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 787@item -N
252b5132
RH
788@itemx --omagic
789Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
790not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
791libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
792mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
793is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
794specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
795
796@kindex --no-omagic
797@cindex OMAGIC
798@item --no-omagic
799This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
800sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
801be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
802shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
803
804@kindex -o @var{output}
805@kindex --output=@var{output}
806@cindex naming the output file
807@item -o @var{output}
808@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 809Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
810option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
811script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
812
813@kindex -O @var{level}
814@cindex generating optimized output
815@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 816If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 817the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
818should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
819option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
820the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
821no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
822of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 823
a712da20
NC
824@kindex -q
825@kindex --emit-relocs
826@cindex retain relocations in final executable
827@item -q
828@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 829Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
830Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
831order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
832in larger executables.
833
dbab7a7b
NC
834This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
835
4f471f39
RS
836@kindex --force-dynamic
837@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
838@item --force-dynamic
839Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
840to VxWorks targets.
841
252b5132
RH
842@cindex partial link
843@cindex relocatable output
844@kindex -r
1049f94e 845@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 846@item -r
1049f94e 847@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 848Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 849turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
850linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
851magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
852@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 853@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
854If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
855linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
856constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
857
62bf86b4
HPN
858When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
859partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
860relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
861example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
862with input files in other formats at all.
863
252b5132
RH
864This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
865
866@kindex -R @var{file}
867@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
868@cindex symbol-only input
869@item -R @var{filename}
870@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
871Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
872relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
873to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
874programs. You may use this option more than once.
875
ff5dcc92 876For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 877followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 878the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
879
880@kindex -s
881@kindex --strip-all
882@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 883@item -s
252b5132
RH
884@itemx --strip-all
885Omit all symbol information from the output file.
886
887@kindex -S
888@kindex --strip-debug
889@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 890@item -S
252b5132
RH
891@itemx --strip-debug
892Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
893
894@kindex -t
895@kindex --trace
896@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 897@item -t
252b5132 898@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 899Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
900
901@kindex -T @var{script}
902@kindex --script=@var{script}
903@cindex script files
904@item -T @var{scriptfile}
905@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
906Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 907@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 908@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
909output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
910the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
911specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
912options accumulate.
252b5132 913
14be8564
L
914@kindex -dT @var{script}
915@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
916@cindex script files
917@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
918@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
919Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
920
921This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
922processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
923command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
924@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
925behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
926command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
927the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
928@samp{gcc}).
929
252b5132
RH
930@kindex -u @var{symbol}
931@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
932@cindex undefined symbol
933@item -u @var{symbol}
934@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
935Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
936symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
937modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
938different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
939option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
940
941@kindex -Ur
942@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 943@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
944For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
945@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 946turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
947@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
948It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
949with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
950be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
951@samp{-r} for the others.
952
577a0623
AM
953@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
954@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
955Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
956@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
957missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
958specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
959multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
960input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
961in a linker script.
a854a4a7 962
252b5132
RH
963@kindex -v
964@kindex -V
965@kindex --version
966@cindex version
967@item -v
968@itemx --version
969@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 970Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
971lists the supported emulations.
972
973@kindex -x
974@kindex --discard-all
975@cindex deleting local symbols
976@item -x
977@itemx --discard-all
978Delete all local symbols.
979
980@kindex -X
981@kindex --discard-locals
982@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 983@item -X
252b5132 984@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
985Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
986system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
987or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
988
989@kindex -y @var{symbol}
990@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
991@cindex symbol tracing
992@item -y @var{symbol}
993@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
994Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
995option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
996to prepend an underscore.
997
998This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
999don't know where the reference is coming from.
1000
1001@kindex -Y @var{path}
1002@item -Y @var{path}
1003Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1004for Solaris compatibility.
1005
1006@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1007@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1008The recognized keywords are:
1009@table @samp
1010
1011@item combreloc
1012Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1013lookup caching possible.
1014
1015@item defs
560e09e9 1016Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1017shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1018
6aa29e7b
JJ
1019@item execstack
1020Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1021
b039ef04
L
1022@item global
1023This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1024the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1025of subsequently loaded libraries.
1026
cd6d6c15
NC
1027@item initfirst
1028This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1029It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1030before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1031the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1032the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1033objects.
1034
1035@item interpose
1036Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1037but the primary executable.
1038
5fa222e4
AM
1039@item lazy
1040When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1041dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1042the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1043Lazy binding is the default.
1044
cd6d6c15
NC
1045@item loadfltr
1046Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1047runtime.
1048
1049@item muldefs
1050Allows multiple definitions.
1051
1052@item nocombreloc
1053Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1054
1055@item nocopyreloc
1056Disables production of copy relocs.
1057
1058@item nodefaultlib
1059Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1060ignore any default library search paths.
1061
1062@item nodelete
1063Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1064
1065@item nodlopen
1066Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1067
1068@item nodump
1069Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1070
6aa29e7b
JJ
1071@item noexecstack
1072Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1073
1074@item norelro
1075Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1076
cd6d6c15
NC
1077@item now
1078When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1079dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1080when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1081deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1082first called.
1083
1084@item origin
1085Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1086
6aa29e7b
JJ
1087@item relro
1088Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1089
24718e3b
L
1090@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1091Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1092
1093@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1094Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1095
04c3a755
NS
1096@item stack-size=@var{value}
1097Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1098Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1099@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1100
cd6d6c15
NC
1101@end table
1102
ece2d90e 1103Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1104
1105@kindex -(
1106@cindex groups of archives
1107@item -( @var{archives} -)
1108@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1109The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1110either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1111
1112The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1113references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1114the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1115archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1116object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1117would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1118they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1119resolved.
1120
1121Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1122it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1123more archives.
1124
69da35b5
NC
1125@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1126@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1127@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1128@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1129Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1130recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1131and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1132the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1133behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1134so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1135restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1136
4a43e768
AM
1137@kindex --as-needed
1138@kindex --no-as-needed
1139@item --as-needed
1140@itemx --no-as-needed
1141This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1142on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1143the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1144on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1145needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1146emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1147non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1148the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries, a
1149non-weak undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
1150Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1151the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1152needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1153from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1154
e56f61be
L
1155@kindex --add-needed
1156@kindex --no-add-needed
1157@item --add-needed
1158@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1159These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1160their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1161options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1162and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1163
252b5132
RH
1164@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1165@item -assert @var{keyword}
1166This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1167
1168@kindex -Bdynamic
1169@kindex -dy
1170@kindex -call_shared
1171@item -Bdynamic
1172@itemx -dy
1173@itemx -call_shared
1174Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1175for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1176default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1177for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1178multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1179@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1180
a1ab1d2a
UD
1181@kindex -Bgroup
1182@item -Bgroup
1183Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1184section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1185object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1186@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1187only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1188
252b5132
RH
1189@kindex -Bstatic
1190@kindex -dn
1191@kindex -non_shared
1192@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1193@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1194@itemx -dn
1195@itemx -non_shared
1196@itemx -static
1197Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1198platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1199variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1200may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1201library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1202option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1203option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1204shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1205references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1206libraries.
252b5132
RH
1207
1208@kindex -Bsymbolic
1209@item -Bsymbolic
1210When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1211definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1212for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1213within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1214platforms which support shared libraries.
1215
40b36307
L
1216@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1217@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1218When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1219symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1220This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1221libraries.
1222
55255dae
L
1223@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1224@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1225Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1226typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1227global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1228within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1229to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1230in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1231which support shared libraries.
1232
1233The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1234scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1235
40b36307
L
1236@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1237@item --dynamic-list-data
1238Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1239
1240@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1241@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1242Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1243is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1244
0b8a70d9
L
1245@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1246@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1247Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1248
252b5132
RH
1249@kindex --check-sections
1250@kindex --no-check-sections
1251@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1252@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1253Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1254been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1255perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1256suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1257allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1258restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1259Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1260force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1261option.
252b5132 1262
ddbb8a31
NC
1263@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1264@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1265@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1266@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1267This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1268by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1269command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1270output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1271input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1272specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1273follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1274behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1275
1276This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1277libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1278mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1279their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1280required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1281the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1282dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1283symbols.
1284
252b5132
RH
1285@cindex cross reference table
1286@kindex --cref
1287@item --cref
1288Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1289generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1290Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1291
1292The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1293easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1294sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1295symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1296definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1297where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1298symbol are listed.
252b5132 1299
4818e05f
AM
1300@cindex common allocation
1301@kindex --no-define-common
1302@item --no-define-common
1303This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1304The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1305@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1306
1307The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1308the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1309of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1310forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1311Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1312from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1313This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1314and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1315duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1316paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1317
252b5132 1318@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1319@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1320@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1321Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1322address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1323times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1324limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1325context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1326symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1327constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1328using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1329Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1330space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1331@var{expression}.
1332
1333@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1334@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1335@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1336@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1337@itemx --no-demangle
1338These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1339and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1340present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1341underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1342mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1343different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1344to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1345demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1346is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1347
1348@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1349@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1350@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1351@item -I@var{file}
1352@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1353Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1354generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1355linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1356doing.
1357
7ce691ae 1358@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1359@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1360@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1361@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1362Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1363with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1364
252b5132
RH
1365@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1366@item --force-exe-suffix
1367Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1368
1369If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1370@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1371the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1372option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1373Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1374it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1375
1376@kindex --gc-sections
1377@kindex --no-gc-sections
1378@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1379@item --gc-sections
1380@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1381Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1382targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1383performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1384@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1385
d5465ba2
AM
1386@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1387examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1388symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1389command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1390referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1391libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1392referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1393the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1394relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1395
ac69cbc6 1396This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1397@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1398specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1399a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1400
c17d87de
NC
1401@kindex --print-gc-sections
1402@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1403@cindex garbage collection
1404@item --print-gc-sections
1405@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1406List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1407printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1408collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1409default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1410be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1411line.
1412
30824704
RM
1413@kindex --print-output-format
1414@cindex output format
1415@item --print-output-format
1416Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1417other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1418in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1419
252b5132
RH
1420@cindex help
1421@cindex usage
1422@kindex --help
1423@item --help
1424Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1425
ea20a7da
CC
1426@kindex --target-help
1427@item --target-help
1428Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1429
2509a395
SL
1430@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1431@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1432Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1433@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1434
1435@cindex memory usage
1436@kindex --no-keep-memory
1437@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1438@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1439symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1440instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1441necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1442while linking a large executable.
1443
1444@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1445@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1446@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1447@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1448Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1449is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1450The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1451behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1452libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1453
aa713662
L
1454@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1455@kindex -z muldefs
1456@item --allow-multiple-definition
1457@itemx -z muldefs
1458Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1459report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1460first definition will be used.
1461
b79e8c78 1462@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1463@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1464@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1465@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1466Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1467This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1468determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1469shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1470how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1471
903249d7
NC
1472The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1473referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1474an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1475a shared library.
1476
1477The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1478libraries specified at link time are that:
1479
1480@itemize @bullet
1481@item
1482A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1483that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1484resolvable at load time.
1485@item
1486There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1487symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1488
1489The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1490select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1491architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1492appropriate memset function.
1493@end itemize
b79e8c78 1494
31941635
L
1495@kindex --no-undefined-version
1496@item --no-undefined-version
1497Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1498it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1499will be issued instead.
1500
3e3b46e5
PB
1501@kindex --default-symver
1502@item --default-symver
1503Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1504exported symbols.
1505
1506@kindex --default-imported-symver
1507@item --default-imported-symver
1508Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1509imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1510
252b5132
RH
1511@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1512@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1513Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1514files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1515been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1516This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1517errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1518have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1519inappropriate.
1520
fe7929ce
AM
1521@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1522@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1523Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1524library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1525
252b5132
RH
1526@kindex --no-whole-archive
1527@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1528Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1529archive files.
1530
1531@cindex output file after errors
1532@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1533@item --noinhibit-exec
1534Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1535Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1536errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1537when it issues any error whatsoever.
1538
0a9c1c8e
CD
1539@kindex -nostdlib
1540@item -nostdlib
1541Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1542command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1543(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1544
252b5132 1545@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1546@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1547@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1548@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1549file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1550@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1551object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1552object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1553should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1554usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1555name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1556list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1557command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1558this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1559@end ifclear
1560
36af4a4e
JJ
1561@kindex -pie
1562@kindex --pic-executable
1563@item -pie
1564@itemx --pic-executable
1565@cindex position independent executables
1566Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1567ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1568libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1569address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1570normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1571defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1572
252b5132
RH
1573@kindex -qmagic
1574@item -qmagic
1575This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1576
1577@kindex -Qy
1578@item -Qy
1579This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1580
1581@kindex --relax
1582@cindex synthesizing linker
1583@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1584@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1585@item --relax
28d5f677 1586@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1587An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1588@ifset GENERIC
1589This option is only supported on a few targets.
1590@end ifset
1591@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1592@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1593@end ifset
1594@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1595@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1596@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1597@ifset XTENSA
1598@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1599@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1600@ifset M68HC11
1601@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1602@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1603@ifset POWERPC
1604@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1605@end ifset
252b5132 1606
28d5f677
NC
1607On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1608global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1609addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1610synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1611instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1612
1613On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1614debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1615@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1616This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1617family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1618@end ifset
1619
1620@ifset GENERIC
1621On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1622but ignored.
1623@end ifset
1624
28d5f677
NC
1625On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1626@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1627
252b5132
RH
1628@cindex retaining specified symbols
1629@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1630@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1631@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1632@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1633Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1634discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1635symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1636@ifset GENERIC
1637(such as VxWorks)
1638@end ifset
1639where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1640run-time memory.
1641
1642@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1643or symbols needed for relocations.
1644
1645You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1646line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1647
1648@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1649@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1650@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1651@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1652Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1653linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1654arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1655them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1656also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1657objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1658@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1659ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1660@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1661
ff5dcc92 1662The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1663SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1664@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1665runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1666options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1667gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1668file systems.
252b5132 1669
ff5dcc92 1670For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1671followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1672the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1673@end ifset
1674
1675@ifset GENERIC
1676@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1677@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1678@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1679When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1680happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1681of the input files.
1682
1683When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1684non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1685shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1686explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1687specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1688@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1689either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1690appearing multiple times.
1691
28c309a2
NC
1692This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1693that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1694is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1695runtime linker would do.
1696
252b5132 1697The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1698libraries:
252b5132
RH
1699@enumerate
1700@item
ff5dcc92 1701Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1702@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1703Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1704between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1705specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1706used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1707at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1708by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1709the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1710@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1711On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1712@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1713environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1714@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1715On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1716directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1717@item
a1b8d843 1718For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1719variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1720@item
ec4eb78a
L
1721For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1722@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1723libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1724@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1725@item
252b5132
RH
1726The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1727@item
1728For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1729exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1730@end enumerate
1731
1732If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1733warning and continue with the link.
1734@end ifset
1735
1736@kindex -shared
1737@kindex -Bshareable
1738@item -shared
1739@itemx -Bshareable
1740@cindex shared libraries
1741Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1742and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1743shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1744undefined symbols in the link.
1745
252b5132 1746@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1747@item --sort-common
1748@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1749@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1750This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1751ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1752sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1753eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1754between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1755specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1756
2509a395
SL
1757@kindex --sort-section=name
1758@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1759This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1760patterns in the linker script.
1761
2509a395
SL
1762@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1763@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1764This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1765patterns in the linker script.
1766
252b5132 1767@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1768@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1769Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1770each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1771size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1772
1773@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1774@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1775Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1776output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1777This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1778certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1779cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1780that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1781support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1782input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1783more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1784many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1785
1786@kindex --stats
1787@item --stats
1788Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1789as execution time and memory usage.
1790
2509a395 1791@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1792@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1793Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1794configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1795that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1796
252b5132
RH
1797@kindex --traditional-format
1798@cindex traditional format
1799@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1800For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1801the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1802use the traditional format instead.
1803
1804@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1805For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1806symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1807full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1808@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1809trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1810combine duplicate entries.
1811
2509a395
SL
1812@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1813@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1814Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1815address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1816times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1817line.
1818@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1819for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1820@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1821should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1822sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1823
2509a395
SL
1824@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1825@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1826@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1827@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1828@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1829@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1830@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1831Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1832@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1833
2509a395
SL
1834@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1835@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1836@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1837When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1838of the first byte of the text segment.
1839
9d5777a3
RM
1840@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1841@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1842@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1843When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1844the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1845text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1846
0d705e9f
AM
1847@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1848@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1849@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1850When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1851model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1852
560e09e9
NC
1853@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1854@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1855Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1856values for @samp{method}:
1857
1858@table @samp
1859@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1860Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1861
1862@item report-all
da8bce14 1863Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1864
1865@item ignore-in-object-files
1866Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1867ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1868
1869@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1870Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1871ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1872when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1873libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1874command line.
1875@end table
1876
1877The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1878by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1879
1880Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1881unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1882can change this to a warning.
1883
1715a13c
L
1884@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1885@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1886@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1887@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1888Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1889supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1890the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1891argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1892
1893@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1894@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1895@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1896Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1897used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1898about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1899is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1900see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1901use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1902symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1903@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1904
7ce691ae 1905@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1906@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1907@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1908@item --warn-common
1909Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 1910a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
1911but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1912you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 1913Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1914warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1915
1916There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1917
1918@table @samp
1919@item int i = 1;
1920A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1921file.
1922
1923@item extern int i;
1924An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1925There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1926variable somewhere.
1927
1928@item int i;
1929A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1930variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1931The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1932single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1933size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1934a definition of the same variable.
1935@end table
1936
1937The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1938Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1939just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1940encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1941a common symbol.
1942
1943@enumerate
1944@item
1945Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1946definition for the symbol.
1947@smallexample
1948@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1949 overridden by definition
1950@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1951@end smallexample
1952
1953@item
1954Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1955the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1956except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1957@smallexample
1958@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1959 overriding common
1960@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1961@end smallexample
1962
1963@item
1964Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1965@smallexample
1966@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1967 of `@var{symbol}'
1968@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1969@end smallexample
1970
1971@item
1972Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1973@smallexample
1974@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1975 overridden by larger common
1976@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1977@end smallexample
1978
1979@item
1980Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1981the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1982encountered in a different order.
1983@smallexample
1984@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1985 overriding smaller common
1986@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1987@end smallexample
1988@end enumerate
1989
1990@kindex --warn-constructors
1991@item --warn-constructors
1992Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1993object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1994detect the use of global constructors.
1995
1996@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1997@item --warn-multiple-gp
1998Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1999This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2000Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2001section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2002of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2003base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2004base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2005bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2006large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2007values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2008option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2009
2010@kindex --warn-once
2011@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2012@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2013@item --warn-once
2014Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2015which refers to it.
2016
2017@kindex --warn-section-align
2018@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2019@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2020@item --warn-section-align
2021Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2022alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2023The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2024is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2025the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2026
8fdd7217
NC
2027@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2028@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2029Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2030
a0c402a5
L
2031@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2032@item --warn-alternate-em
2033Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2034
560e09e9
NC
2035@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2036@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2037If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2038@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2039This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2040
2041@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2042@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2043This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2044it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2045
252b5132
RH
2046@kindex --whole-archive
2047@cindex including an entire archive
2048@item --whole-archive
2049For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2050@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2051in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2052files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2053library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2054library. This option may be used more than once.
2055
7ec229ce 2056Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2057about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2058Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2059list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2060your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2061
2509a395
SL
2062@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2063@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2064Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2065@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2066undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2067@var{symbol}.
2068
2069This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2070wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2071wishes to call the system function, it should call
2072@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2073
2074Here is a trivial example:
2075
2076@smallexample
2077void *
cc2f008e 2078__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2079@{
cc2f008e 2080 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2081 return __real_malloc (c);
2082@}
2083@end smallexample
2084
ff5dcc92 2085If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2086all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2087instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2088call the real @code{malloc} function.
2089
2090You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2091links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2092you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2093file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2094call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2095
6aa29e7b
JJ
2096@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2097@item --eh-frame-hdr
2098Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2099@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2100
e41b3a13
JJ
2101@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2102@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2103Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2104generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2105if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2106
6c1439be
L
2107@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2108@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2109@item --enable-new-dtags
2110@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2111This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2112systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2113@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2114and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2115If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2116created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2117those options are only available for ELF systems.
2118
2d643429 2119@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2120@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2121Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2122close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2123time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2124increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2125value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2126
fdc90cb4
JJ
2127@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2128@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2129Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2130@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2131new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2132the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2133hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2134
35835446
JR
2135@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2136@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2137This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2138linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2139for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2140about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2141
4f9c04f7 2142Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21431021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2144run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2145has been used.
2146
2147The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2148enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2149
c0065db7
RM
2150@kindex --build-id
2151@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2152@item --build-id
2153@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2154Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2155The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2156file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2157@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2158parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2159@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2160@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2161an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2162characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2163omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2164
2165The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2166that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2167unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2168to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2169file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2170string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2171
2172Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2173@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2174@end table
2175
0285c67d
NC
2176@c man end
2177
36f63dca 2178@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2179
0285c67d
NC
2180@c man begin OPTIONS
2181
ff5dcc92 2182The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2183the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2184normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2185use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2186@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2187like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2188symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2189object file).
2190
2191In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2192support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2193PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2194values by either a space or an equals sign.
2195
ff5dcc92 2196@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2197
2198@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2199@item --add-stdcall-alias
2200If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2201as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2202[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2203
2204@kindex --base-file
2205@item --base-file @var{file}
2206Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2207addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2208@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2209[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2210
2211@kindex --dll
2212@item --dll
2213Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2214@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2215file.
bb10df36 2216[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2217
88183869
DK
2218@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2219@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2220@item --enable-long-section-names
2221@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2222The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2223the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2224for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2225fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2226to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2227allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2228disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2229generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2230as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2231with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2232GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2233information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2234option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2235section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2236when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2237image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2238[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2239
252b5132
RH
2240@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2241@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2242@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2243@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2244If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2245do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2246only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2247resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2248undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2249@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2250to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2251warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2252import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2253to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2254feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2255@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2256mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2257[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2258
522f09cd
KT
2259@kindex --leading-underscore
2260@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2261@item --leading-underscore
2262@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2263For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2264in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2265disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2266
252b5132
RH
2267@cindex DLLs, creating
2268@kindex --export-all-symbols
2269@item --export-all-symbols
2270If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2271be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2272otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2273explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2274attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2275option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2276@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2277@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2278exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2279re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2280such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2281@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2282@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2283Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2284not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2285extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2286(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2287These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2288@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2289@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2290@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2291@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2292[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2293
2294@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2295@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2296Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2297exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2298[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2299
2927aaca
NC
2300@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2301@item --exclude-all-symbols
2302Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2303[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2304
252b5132
RH
2305@kindex --file-alignment
2306@item --file-alignment
2307Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2308file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2309512.
bb10df36 2310[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2311
2312@cindex heap size
2313@kindex --heap
2314@item --heap @var{reserve}
2315@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2316Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2317to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2318committed.
bb10df36 2319[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2320
2321@cindex image base
2322@kindex --image-base
2323@item --image-base @var{value}
2324Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2325the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2326is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2327your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2328other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2329for dlls.
bb10df36 2330[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2331
2332@kindex --kill-at
2333@item --kill-at
2334If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2335symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2336[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2337
26d2d8a2
BF
2338@kindex --large-address-aware
2339@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2340If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2341header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2342greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2343or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2344section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2345[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2346
252b5132
RH
2347@kindex --major-image-version
2348@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2349Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2350[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2351
2352@kindex --major-os-version
2353@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2354Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2355[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2356
2357@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2358@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2359Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2360[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2361
2362@kindex --minor-image-version
2363@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2364Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2365[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2366
2367@kindex --minor-os-version
2368@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2369Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2370[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2371
2372@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2373@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2374Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2375[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2376
2377@cindex DEF files, creating
2378@cindex DLLs, creating
2379@kindex --output-def
2380@item --output-def @var{file}
2381The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2382file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2383(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2384library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2385automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2386[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2387
b044cda1
CW
2388@cindex DLLs, creating
2389@kindex --out-implib
2390@item --out-implib @var{file}
2391The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2392import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2393import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2394may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2395makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2396creation step.
bb10df36 2397[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2398
2399@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2400@item --enable-auto-image-base
2401Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2402using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2403from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2404collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2405avoided.
bb10df36 2406[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2407
2408@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2409@item --disable-auto-image-base
2410Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2411user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2412default.
bb10df36 2413[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2414
2415@cindex DLLs, linking to
2416@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2417@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2418When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2419search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2420@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2421between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2422uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2423@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2424[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2425
2426@kindex --enable-auto-import
2427@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2428Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2429DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2430building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2431'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2432to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2433specification published by Microsoft.
2434
e2a83dd0
NC
2435Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2436data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2437placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2438around a problem with consts that is described here:
2439http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2440
4d8907ac
DS
2441Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2442see this message:
0d888aac 2443
ece2d90e 2444"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2445documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2446
ece2d90e
NC
2447This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2448ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2449allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2450fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2451constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2452multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2453this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2454of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2455the warning, and exit.
2456
2457There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2458data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2459
2fa9fc65
NC
2460One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2461of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2462this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2463
c0065db7
RM
2464A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2465that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2466there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2467a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2468
2469@example
2470extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2471extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2472 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2473@end example
2474
2475or
2476
2477@example
2478extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2479extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2480 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2481@end example
2482
c0065db7 2483For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2484is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2485
2486@example
2487extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2488extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2489 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2490@end example
2491
c406afaf
NC
2492or
2493
2494@example
2495extern long long extern_ll;
2496extern_ll -->
2497 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2498@end example
2499
2fa9fc65 2500A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2501'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2502@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2503requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2504building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2505merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2506between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2507constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2508
2509Original:
2510@example
2511--foo.h
2512extern int arr[];
2513--foo.c
2514#include "foo.h"
2515void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2516 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2517@}
2518@end example
2519
2520Solution 1:
2521@example
2522--foo.h
2523extern int arr[];
2524--foo.c
2525#include "foo.h"
2526void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2527 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2528 volatile int *parr = arr;
2529 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2530@}
2531@end example
2532
2533Solution 2:
2534@example
2535--foo.h
2536/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2537#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2538 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2539#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2540#else
2541#define FOO_IMPORT
2542#endif
2543extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2544--foo.c
2545#include "foo.h"
2546void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2547 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2548@}
2549@end example
2550
c0065db7 2551A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2552library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2553for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2554functions).
bb10df36 2555[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2556
2557@kindex --disable-auto-import
2558@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2559Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2560@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2561[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2562
2fa9fc65
NC
2563@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2564@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2565If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2566that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2567a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2568environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2569[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2570
2571@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2572@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2573Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2574DLLs.
bb10df36 2575[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2576
b044cda1
CW
2577@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2578@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2579Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2580[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2581
252b5132
RH
2582@kindex --section-alignment
2583@item --section-alignment
2584Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2585addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2586[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2587
2588@cindex stack size
2589@kindex --stack
2590@item --stack @var{reserve}
2591@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2592Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2593to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2594committed.
bb10df36 2595[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2596
2597@kindex --subsystem
2598@item --subsystem @var{which}
2599@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2600@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2601Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2602legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2603@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2604the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2605@var{which}.
bb10df36 2606[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2607
2f563b51
DK
2608The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2609of the PE file header:
2610[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2611
2612@kindex --dynamicbase
2613@item --dynamicbase
2614The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2615randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2616Vista for i386 PE targets.
2617
2618@kindex --forceinteg
2619@item --forceinteg
2620Code integrity checks are enforced.
2621
2622@kindex --nxcompat
2623@item --nxcompat
2624The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2625This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2626
2627@kindex --no-isolation
2628@item --no-isolation
2629Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2630
2631@kindex --no-seh
2632@item --no-seh
2633The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2634this image.
2635
2636@kindex --no-bind
2637@item --no-bind
2638Do not bind this image.
2639
2640@kindex --wdmdriver
2641@item --wdmdriver
2642The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2643
2f563b51
DK
2644@kindex --tsaware
2645@item --tsaware
2646The image is Terminal Server aware.
2647
252b5132
RH
2648@end table
2649
0285c67d
NC
2650@c man end
2651
ac145307
BS
2652@ifset C6X
2653@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2654
2655@c man begin OPTIONS
2656
2657The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2658libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2659all executables use an index of 0.
2660
2661@table @gcctabopt
2662
2663@kindex --dsbt-size
2664@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2665This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2666or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2667entries.
2668
2669@kindex --dsbt-index
2670@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2671This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2672to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2673executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2674@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2675
fbd9ad90
PB
2676@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2677The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2678exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2679
ac145307
BS
2680@end table
2681
2682@c man end
2683@end ifset
2684
93fd0973
SC
2685@ifset M68HC11
2686@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2687
2688@c man begin OPTIONS
2689
2690The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2691memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2692
2693@table @gcctabopt
2694
2695@kindex --no-trampoline
2696@item --no-trampoline
2697This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2698is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2699instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2700
2701@kindex --bank-window
2702@item --bank-window @var{name}
2703This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2704the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2705The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2706paging and addresses within the memory window.
2707
2708@end table
2709
2710@c man end
2711@end ifset
2712
7fb9f789
NC
2713@ifset M68K
2714@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2715
2716@c man begin OPTIONS
2717
2718The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2719when linking for 68K targets.
2720
2721@table @gcctabopt
2722
2723@kindex --got
2724@item --got=@var{type}
2725This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2726@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2727@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2728Info entry for @file{ld}.
2729
2730@end table
2731
2732@c man end
2733@end ifset
2734
252b5132
RH
2735@ifset UsesEnvVars
2736@node Environment
2737@section Environment Variables
2738
0285c67d
NC
2739@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2740
560e09e9 2741You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2742@ifclear SingleFormat
2743@code{GNUTARGET},
2744@end ifclear
2745@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2746
36f63dca 2747@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2748@kindex GNUTARGET
2749@cindex default input format
2750@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2751use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2752of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2753@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2754of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2755attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2756this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2757there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2758object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2759BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2760in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2761@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2762
2763@kindex LDEMULATION
2764@cindex default emulation
2765@cindex emulation, default
2766@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2767@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2768behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2769available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2770the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2771variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2772linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2773
2774@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2775@cindex demangling, default
2776Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2777@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2778default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2779a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2780may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2781options.
2782
0285c67d
NC
2783@c man end
2784@end ifset
2785
252b5132
RH
2786@node Scripts
2787@chapter Linker Scripts
2788
2789@cindex scripts
2790@cindex linker scripts
2791@cindex command files
2792Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2793written in the linker command language.
2794
2795The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2796the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2797the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2798more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2799direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2800described below.
2801
2802The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2803yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2804linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2805to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2806such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2807
2808You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2809line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2810default linker script.
2811
2812You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2813to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2814Linker Scripts}.
2815
2816@menu
2817* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2818* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2819* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2820* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2821* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2822* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2823* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2824* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2825* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2826* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2827* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2828@end menu
2829
2830@node Basic Script Concepts
2831@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2832@cindex linker script concepts
2833We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2834describe the linker script language.
2835
2836The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2837file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2838@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2839The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2840purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2841among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2842section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2843in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2844
2845Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2846also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 2847contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
2848the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2849A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2850area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2851loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2852which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2853of debugging information.
2854
2855Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2856first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2857the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2858@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2859section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2860same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2861is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2862(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2863based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2864RAM address would be the VMA.
2865
2866You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2867program with the @samp{-h} option.
2868
2869Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2870@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2871has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2872information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2873will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2874static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2875referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2876
2877You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2878program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2879option.
2880
2881@node Script Format
2882@section Linker Script Format
2883@cindex linker script format
2884Linker scripts are text files.
2885
2886You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2887either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2888symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2889generally ignored.
2890
2891Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2892If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2893otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2894double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2895file name.
2896
2897You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2898@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2899to whitespace.
2900
2901@node Simple Example
2902@section Simple Linker Script Example
2903@cindex linker script example
2904@cindex example of linker script
2905Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2906
2907The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2908@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2909memory layout of the output file.
2910
2911The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2912describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2913code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2914@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2915Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2916your input files.
2917
2918For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
29190x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2920linker script which will do that:
2921@smallexample
2922SECTIONS
2923@{
2924 . = 0x10000;
2925 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2926 . = 0x8000000;
2927 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2928 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2929@}
2930@end smallexample
2931
2932You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2933followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2934descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2935
252b5132
RH
2936The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2937sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2938counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2939other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2940current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2941incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2942@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2943
2944The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2945required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2946after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2947which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2948wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2949means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2950
2951Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2952@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2953@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2954
2955The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2956the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2957at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2958output section, the value of the location counter will be
2959@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2960effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2961immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2962
2963The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2964alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2965example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2966sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2967may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2968sections.
2969
2970That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2971
2972@node Simple Commands
2973@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2974@cindex linker script simple commands
2975In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2976
2977@menu
2978* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2979* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2980@ifclear SingleFormat
2981* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2982@end ifclear
2983
4a93e180 2984* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2985* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2986@end menu
2987
2988@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2989@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2990@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2991@cindex start of execution
2992@cindex first instruction
2993@cindex entry point
2994The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2995point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2996entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2997@smallexample
2998ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2999@end smallexample
3000
3001There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3002entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3003stopping when one of them succeeds:
3004@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3005@item
252b5132 3006the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3007@item
252b5132 3008the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3009@item
3ab904c4
NC
3010the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3011targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3012check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3013@item
252b5132 3014the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3015@item
252b5132
RH
3016The address @code{0}.
3017@end itemize
3018
3019@node File Commands
36f63dca 3020@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3021@cindex linker script file commands
3022Several linker script commands deal with files.
3023
3024@table @code
3025@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3026@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3027@cindex including a linker script
3028Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3029be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3030with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
303110 levels deep.
3032
4006703d
NS
3033You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3034@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3035
252b5132
RH
3036@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3037@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3038@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3039@cindex input files in linker scripts
3040@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3041@cindex linker script input object files
3042The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3043in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3044
3045For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3046a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3047then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3048
3049In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3050script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3051
e3f2db7f
AO
3052In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3053with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3054located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3055for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3056open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3057linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3058description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3059
ff5dcc92 3060If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3061name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3062@samp{-l}.
3063
3064When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3065files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3066script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3067
3068@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3069@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3070@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3071@cindex grouping input files
3072The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3073files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3074new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3075in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3076
b717d30e
JJ
3077@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3078@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3079@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3080This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3081commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3082as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3083with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3084when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3085@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3086and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3087setting afterwards.
3088
252b5132
RH
3089@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3090@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3091@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3092The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3093@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3094@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3095Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3096precedence.
3097
3098You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3099output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3100
3101@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3102@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3103@cindex library search path in linker script
3104@cindex archive search path in linker script
3105@cindex search path in linker script
3106The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3107@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3108@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3109on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3110are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3111the command line option are searched first.
3112
3113@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3114@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3115@cindex first input file
3116The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3117that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3118though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3119when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3120first file.
3121@end table
3122
3123@ifclear SingleFormat
3124@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3125@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3126A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3127
3128@table @code
3129@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3130@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3131@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3132@cindex output file format in linker script
3133The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3134output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3135exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3136(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3137line option takes precedence.
3138
3139You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3140formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3141This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3142desired endianness.
3143
3144If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3145will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3146output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3147used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3148
3149For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3150command:
3151@smallexample
3152OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3153@end smallexample
3154This says that the default format for the output file is
3155@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3156option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3157format.
3158
3159@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3160@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3161@cindex input file format in linker script
3162The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3163files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3164This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3165(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3166is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3167command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3168@end table
3169@end ifclear
3170
4a93e180
NC
3171@node REGION_ALIAS
3172@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3173@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3174@cindex region alias
3175@cindex region names
3176
3177Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3178@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3179
3180@smallexample
3181REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3182@end smallexample
3183
3184The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3185memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3186to memory regions. An example follows.
3187
3188Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3189memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3190that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3191non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3192access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3193read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3194sections:
3195
3196@itemize @bullet
3197@item
3198@code{.text} program code;
3199@item
3200@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3201@item
3202@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3203@item
3204@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3205@end itemize
3206
3207The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3208part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3209output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3210systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3211@code{C}:
3212@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3213@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3214@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3215@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3216@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3217@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3218@end multitable
3219The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3220loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3221the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3222the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3223
3224The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3225includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3226memory layout:
3227@smallexample
3228INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3229
3230SECTIONS
3231 @{
3232 .text :
3233 @{
3234 *(.text)
3235 @} > REGION_TEXT
3236 .rodata :
3237 @{
3238 *(.rodata)
3239 rodata_end = .;
3240 @} > REGION_RODATA
3241 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3242 @{
3243 data_start = .;
3244 *(.data)
3245 @} > REGION_DATA
3246 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3247 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3248 .bss :
3249 @{
3250 *(.bss)
3251 @} > REGION_BSS
3252 @}
3253@end smallexample
3254
3255Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3256regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3257variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3258@table @code
3259@item A
3260Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3261@smallexample
3262MEMORY
3263 @{
3264 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3265 @}
3266
3267REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3268REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3269REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3270REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3271@end smallexample
3272@item B
3273Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3274into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3275@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3276@smallexample
3277MEMORY
3278 @{
3279 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3280 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3281 @}
3282
3283REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3284REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3285REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3286REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3287@end smallexample
3288@item C
3289Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3290@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3291initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3292system start into the @code{RAM}.
3293@smallexample
3294MEMORY
3295 @{
3296 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3297 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3298 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3299 @}
3300
3301REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3302REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3303REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3304REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3305@end smallexample
3306@end table
3307
3308It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3309@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3310necessary:
3311@smallexample
3312#include <string.h>
3313
3314extern char data_start [];
3315extern char data_size [];
3316extern char data_load_start [];
3317
3318void copy_data(void)
3319@{
3320 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3321 @{
3322 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3323 @}
3324@}
3325@end smallexample
3326
252b5132 3327@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3328@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3329There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3330
3331@table @code
3332@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3333@kindex ASSERT
3334@cindex assertion in linker script
3335Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3336with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3337
3338@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3339@kindex EXTERN
3340@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3341Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3342symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3343modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3344each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3345command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3346
3347@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3348@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3349@cindex common allocation in linker script
3350This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3351to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3352output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3353
4818e05f
AM
3354@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3355@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3356@cindex common allocation in linker script
3357This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3358command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3359to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3360
53d25da6
AM
3361@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3362@kindex INSERT
3363@cindex insert user script into default script
3364This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3365augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3366inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3367@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3368default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3369sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3370linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3371insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3372linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3373default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3374of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3375to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3376is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3377
3378@smallexample
3379SECTIONS
3380@{
3381 OVERLAY :
3382 @{
3383 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3384 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3385 @}
3386@}
3387INSERT AFTER .text;
3388@end smallexample
3389
252b5132
RH
3390@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3391@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3392@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3393This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3394references among certain output sections.
3395
3396In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3397using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3398will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3399errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3400a function defined in the other section.
3401
3402The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3403@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3404an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3405@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3406names.
3407
3408@ifclear SingleFormat
3409@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3410@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3411@cindex machine architecture
3412@cindex architecture
3413Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3414of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3415architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3416the @samp{-f} option.
3417@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3418
3419@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3420@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3421This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3422@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3423in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3424@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3425@end table
3426
3427@node Assignments
3428@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3429@cindex assignment in scripts
3430@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3431@cindex variables, defining
3432You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3433the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3434
3435@menu
3436* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3437* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3438* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3439* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3440* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3441@end menu
3442
3443@node Simple Assignments
3444@subsection Simple Assignments
3445
3446You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3447
3448@table @code
3449@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3450@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3451@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3452@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3453@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3454@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3455@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3456@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3457@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3458@end table
3459
3460The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3461@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3462defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3463
3464The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3465may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3466
3467The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3468
3469Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3470
3471You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3472statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3473section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3474
3475The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3476expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3477
3478Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3479assignments may be used:
3480
3481@smallexample
3482floating_point = 0;
3483SECTIONS
3484@{
3485 .text :
3486 @{
3487 *(.text)
3488 _etext = .;
3489 @}
156e34dd 3490 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3491 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3492@}
3493@end smallexample
3494@noindent
3495In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3496zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3497the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3498defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3499upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3500
eb8476a6
MR
3501@node HIDDEN
3502@subsection HIDDEN
3503@cindex HIDDEN
3504For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3505exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3506
3507Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3508@code{HIDDEN}:
3509
3510@smallexample
3511HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3512SECTIONS
3513@{
3514 .text :
3515 @{
3516 *(.text)
3517 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3518 @}
3519 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3520 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3521@}
3522@end smallexample
3523@noindent
3524In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3525
252b5132
RH
3526@node PROVIDE
3527@subsection PROVIDE
3528@cindex PROVIDE
3529In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3530only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3531the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3532@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3533@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3534@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3535@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3536@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3537
3538Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3539@smallexample
3540SECTIONS
3541@{
3542 .text :
3543 @{
3544 *(.text)
3545 _etext = .;
3546 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3547 @}
3548@}
3549@end smallexample
3550
3551In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3552underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3553the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3554underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3555If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3556linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3557
7af8e998
L
3558@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3559@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3560@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3561Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3562hidden and won't be exported.
3563
73ae6183
NC
3564@node Source Code Reference
3565@subsection Source Code Reference
3566
3567Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3568intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3569a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3570symbol that does not have a value.
3571
3572Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3573transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3574stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3575prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3576mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3577of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3578variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3579linker script variable might be referred to as:
3580
3581@smallexample
3582 extern int foo;
3583@end smallexample
3584
3585But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3586
3587@smallexample
3588 _foo = 1000;
3589@end smallexample
3590
3591In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3592transformation has taken place.
3593
3594When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3595things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3596in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3597second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3598table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3599contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3600value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3601
3602@smallexample
3603 int foo = 1000;
3604@end smallexample
3605
10bf6894 3606creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3607holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3608number 1000 is initially stored.
3609
3610When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3611first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3612memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3613So:
3614
3615@smallexample
3616 foo = 1;
3617@end smallexample
3618
3619looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3620associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3621address. Whereas:
3622
3623@smallexample
3624 int * a = & foo;
3625@end smallexample
3626
10bf6894 3627looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3628and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3629the variable @samp{a}.
3630
3631Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3632the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3633an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3634
3635@smallexample
3636 foo = 1000;
3637@end smallexample
3638
3639creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3640the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3641address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3642linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3643access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3644
3645Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3646you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3647use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3648section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3649linker script contains these declarations:
3650
3651@smallexample
3652@group
3653 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3654 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3655 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3656@end group
3657@end smallexample
3658
3659Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3660
3661@smallexample
3662@group
3663 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3664
73ae6183
NC
3665 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3666@end group
3667@end smallexample
3668
3669Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3670
252b5132 3671@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3672@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3673@kindex SECTIONS
3674The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3675into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3676
3677The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3678@smallexample
3679SECTIONS
3680@{
3681 @var{sections-command}
3682 @var{sections-command}
3683 @dots{}
3684@}
3685@end smallexample
3686
3687Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3688
3689@itemize @bullet
3690@item
3691an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3692@item
3693a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3694@item
3695an output section description
3696@item
3697an overlay description
3698@end itemize
3699
3700The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3701@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3702those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3703understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3704the layout of the output file.
3705
3706Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3707below.
3708
3709If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3710linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3711section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3712input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3713example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3714in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3715
3716@menu
3717* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3718* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3719* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3720* Input Section:: Input section description
3721* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3722* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3723* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3724* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3725* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3726@end menu
3727
3728@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3729@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3730The full description of an output section looks like this:
3731@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3732@group
7e7d5768 3733@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3734 [AT(@var{lma})]
3735 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3736 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3737 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3738 @{
3739 @var{output-section-command}
3740 @var{output-section-command}
3741 @dots{}
562d3460 3742 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3743@end group
3744@end smallexample
3745
3746Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3747
3748The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3749name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3750The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3751
3752Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3753
3754@itemize @bullet
3755@item
3756a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3757@item
3758an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3759@item
3760data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3761@item
3762a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3763@end itemize
3764
3765@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3766@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3767@cindex name, section
3768@cindex section name
3769The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3770meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3771support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3772must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3773example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3774output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3775names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3776quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3777characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3778commas must be quoted.
3779
3780The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3781Discarding}.
3782
3783@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3784@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3785@cindex address, section
3786@cindex section address
3787The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3788address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3789is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3790
3791If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3792section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3793to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3794alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3795contained within the output section.
3796
3797The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3798
3799@itemize @bullet
3800@item
3801If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3802is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3803in that region.
3804
3805@item
3806If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3807regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3808section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3809be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3810
3811@item
3812If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3813the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3814counter.
3815@end itemize
3816
3817@noindent
3818For example:
3819
252b5132
RH
3820@smallexample
3821.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3822@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3823
252b5132
RH
3824@noindent
3825and
ea5cae92 3826
252b5132
RH
3827@smallexample
3828.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3829@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3830
252b5132
RH
3831@noindent
3832are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3833@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3834counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3835counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3836input sections.
252b5132
RH
3837
3838The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3839For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3840so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3841do something like this:
3842@smallexample
3843.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3844@end smallexample
3845@noindent
3846This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3847aligned upward to the specified value.
3848
3849Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3850location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3851sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3852
3853@node Input Section
36f63dca 3854@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3855@cindex input sections
3856@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3857The most common output section command is an input section description.
3858
3859The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3860You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3861in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3862map the input files into your memory layout.
3863
3864@menu
3865* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3866* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3867* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3868* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3869* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3870@end menu
3871
3872@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3873@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3874@cindex input section basics
3875An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3876by a list of section names in parentheses.
3877
3878The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3879describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3880
3881The most common input section description is to include all input
3882sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3883include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3884@smallexample
3885*(.text)
3886@end smallexample
3887@noindent
18625d54
CM
3888Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3889of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3890match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3891example:
252b5132 3892@smallexample
b4346c09 3893*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3894@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3895will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3896@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3897
3898There are two ways to include more than one section:
3899@smallexample
3900*(.text .rdata)
3901*(.text) *(.rdata)
3902@end smallexample
3903@noindent
3904The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3905@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3906first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3907they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3908@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3909@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3910
3911You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3912You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3913needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3914@smallexample
3915data.o(.data)
3916@end smallexample
3917
ae17ab41
CM
3918To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
3919of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
3920
3921Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
3922
3923@smallexample
3924@group
3925SECTIONS @{
3926 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
3927 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
3928@}
3929@end group
3930@end smallexample
3931
3932In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
3933input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
3934@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
3935@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
3936whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
3937
967928e9
AM
3938You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3939matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3940with no whitespace around the colon.
3941
3942@table @samp
3943@item archive:file
3944matches file within archive
3945@item archive:
3946matches the whole archive
3947@item :file
3948matches file but not one in an archive
3949@end table
3950
3951Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3952wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3953single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3954@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3955within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3956also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3957other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3958from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3959command.
3960
252b5132
RH
3961If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3962the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3963commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3964@smallexample
3965data.o
3966@end smallexample
3967
967928e9
AM
3968When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3969and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3970characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3971name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3972did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3973though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3974@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3975the archive search path.
3976
3977@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3978@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3979@cindex input section wildcards
3980@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3981@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3982@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3983In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3984name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3985
3986The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3987pattern for the file name.
3988
3989The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3990
3991@table @samp
3992@item *
3993matches any number of characters
3994@item ?
3995matches any single character
3996@item [@var{chars}]
3997matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3998character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3999@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4000@item \
4001quotes the following character
4002@end table
4003
4004When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4005will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4006Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4007exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4008@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4009a @samp{/} character.
4010
4011File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4012specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4013does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4014
4015If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4016appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4017will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4018sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4019@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4020@smallexample
4021.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4022.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4023@end smallexample
4024
bcaa7b3e 4025@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4026Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4027in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4028this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4029pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4030@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4031into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4032
bcaa7b3e
L
4033@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4034@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4035difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4036descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4037Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4038reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4039
02ecc8e9
L
4040@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4041@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4042difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4043ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4044encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4045
bcaa7b3e
L
4046@cindex SORT
4047@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4048
4049When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4050can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4051
4052@enumerate
4053@item
4054@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4055It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4056sections have the same name.
4057@item
4058@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4059It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4060sections have the same alignment.
4061@item
c0065db7 4062@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4063treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4064@item
4065@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4066is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4067@item
4068All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4069@end enumerate
4070
4071When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4072section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4073takes precedence over the command line option.
4074
4075If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4076command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4077treated as nested sorting command.
4078
4079@enumerate
4080@item
4081@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4082@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4083@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4084@item
4085@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4086@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4087@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4088@end enumerate
4089
4090If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4091command line option will be ignored.
4092
eda680f8
L
4093@cindex SORT_NONE
4094@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4095section sorting option.
4096
252b5132
RH
4097If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4098@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4099precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4100
4101This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4102files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4103sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4104The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4105with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4106linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4107@smallexample
4108@group
4109SECTIONS @{
4110 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4111 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4112 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4113 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4114@}
4115@end group
4116@end smallexample
4117
4118@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4119@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4120@cindex common symbol placement
4121@cindex uninitialized data placement
4122A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4123file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4124linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4125named @samp{COMMON}.
4126
4127You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4128other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4129particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4130input files are placed in another section.
4131
4132In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4133@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4134@smallexample
4135.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4136@end smallexample
4137
4138@cindex scommon section
4139@cindex small common symbols
4140Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4141example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4142symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4143different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4144the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4145symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4146to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4147locations.
4148
4149@cindex [COMMON]
4150You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4151notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4152@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4153
4154@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4155@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4156@cindex KEEP
4157@cindex garbage collection
4158When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4159it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4160This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4161with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4162@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4163
4164@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4165@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4166The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4167to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4168start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4169@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4170follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4171@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4172@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4173All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4174files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4175
4176@smallexample
4177@group
4178SECTIONS @{
4179 outputa 0x10000 :
4180 @{
4181 all.o
4182 foo.o (.input1)
4183 @}
36f63dca
NC
4184@end group
4185@group
252b5132
RH
4186 outputb :
4187 @{
4188 foo.o (.input2)
4189 foo1.o (.input1)
4190 @}
36f63dca
NC
4191@end group
4192@group
252b5132
RH
4193 outputc :
4194 @{
4195 *(.input1)
4196 *(.input2)
4197 @}
4198@}
4199@end group
a1ab1d2a 4200@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4201
4202@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4203@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4204@cindex data
4205@cindex section data
4206@cindex output section data
4207@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4208@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4209@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4210@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4211@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4212You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4213@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4214an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4215parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4216value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4217counter.
4218
4219The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4220store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4221bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4222stored.
4223
4224For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4225of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4226@smallexample
4227BYTE(1)
4228LONG(addr)
4229@end smallexample
4230
4231When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4232same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4233target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4234@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4235@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4236
4237If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4238which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4239When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4240true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4241endianness of the first input object file.
4242
36f63dca 4243Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4244between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4245@smallexample
4246SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4247@end smallexample
4248whereas this will work:
4249@smallexample
4250SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4251@end smallexample
4252
252b5132
RH
4253@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4254@cindex holes, filling
4255@cindex unspecified memory
4256You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4257current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4258otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4259gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4260with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4261necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4262point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4263than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4264different parts of an output section.
4265
4266This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4267value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4268@smallexample
563e308f 4269FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4270@end smallexample
4271
4272The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4273section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4274part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4275entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4276precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4277expression.
252b5132
RH
4278
4279@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4280@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4281There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4282commands.
4283
4284@table @code
4285@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4286@cindex input filename symbols
4287@cindex filename symbols
4288@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4289The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4290The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4291file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4292the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4293
4294This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4295normally used for any other object file format.
4296
4297@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4298@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4299@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4300@item CONSTRUCTORS
4301When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4302unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4303destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4304arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4305automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4306For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4307linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4308@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4309ignored for other object file formats.
4310
4311The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4312constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4313Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4314the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4315first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4316of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4317compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4318formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4319@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4320the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4321destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4322@code{exit}.
4323
4324For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4325arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4326addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4327and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4328linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4329runtime code expects to see.
4330
4331@smallexample
4332 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4333 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4334 *(.ctors)
4335 LONG(0)
4336 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4337 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4338 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4339 *(.dtors)
4340 LONG(0)
4341 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4342@end smallexample
4343
4344If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4345which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4346are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4347are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4348command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4349@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4350@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4351@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4352
4353Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4354and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4355need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4356scripts.
4357
4358@end table
4359
4360@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4361@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4362@cindex discarding sections
4363@cindex sections, discarding
4364@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4365The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4366for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4367be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4368@smallexample
49c13adb 4369.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4370@end smallexample
4371@noindent
4372will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4373@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4374sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4375space in an output section will also create the output section.
4376
a0976ea4 4377The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4378on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4379symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4380the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4381section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4382
4383@cindex /DISCARD/
4384The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4385input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4386section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4387
4388@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4389@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4390@cindex output section attributes
4391We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4392like this:
0c71d759 4393
252b5132 4394@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4395@group
7e7d5768 4396@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4397 [AT(@var{lma})]
4398 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4399 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4400 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4401 @{
4402 @var{output-section-command}
4403 @var{output-section-command}
4404 @dots{}
562d3460 4405 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4406@end group
4407@end smallexample
0c71d759 4408
252b5132
RH
4409We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4410@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4411remaining section attributes.
4412
a1ab1d2a 4413@menu
252b5132
RH
4414* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4415* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4416* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4417* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4418* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4419* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4420* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4421* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4422@end menu
4423
4424@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4425@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4426Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4427parentheses. The following types are defined:
4428
4429@table @code
4430@item NOLOAD
4431The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4432loaded into memory when the program is run.
4433@item DSECT
4434@itemx COPY
4435@itemx INFO
4436@itemx OVERLAY
4437These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4438rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4439marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4440section when the program is run.
4441@end table
4442
4443@kindex NOLOAD
4444@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4445@cindex loading, preventing
4446The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4447the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4448the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4449@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4450need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4451@smallexample
4452@group
4453SECTIONS @{
4454 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4455 @dots{}
4456@}
4457@end group
4458@end smallexample
4459
4460@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4461@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4462@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4463@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4464@cindex load address
4465@cindex section load address
4466Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4467@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4468@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4469specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4470address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4471
ea5cae92
NC
4472The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4473specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4474takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4475load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4476region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4477
4478If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4479section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4480load address:
4481
4482@itemize @bullet
4483@item
4484If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4485the LMA address as well.
4486
4487@item
4488If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4489
4490@item
4491Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4492with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4493section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4494VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4495the last section in the located region.
4496
4497@item
4498If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4499that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4500
4501@item
4502If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4503section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4504@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4505
4506@cindex ROM initialized data
4507@cindex initialized data in ROM
4508This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4509example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4510called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4511@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4512even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4513uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4514defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4515counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4516
4517@smallexample
4518@group
4519SECTIONS
4520 @{
4521 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4522 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4523 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4524 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4525 .bss 0x3000 :
4526 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4527@}
4528@end group
4529@end smallexample
4530
4531The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4532this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4533the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4534how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4535script.
4536
4537@smallexample
4538@group
4539extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4540char *src = &_etext;
4541char *dst = &_data;
4542
ea5cae92
NC
4543/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4544while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4545 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4546
ea5cae92 4547/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4548for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4549 *dst = 0;
4550@end group
4551@end smallexample
4552
bbf115d3
L
4553@node Forced Output Alignment
4554@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4555@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4556@cindex forcing output section alignment
4557@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4558You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4559
7e7d5768
AM
4560@node Forced Input Alignment
4561@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4562@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4563@cindex forcing input section alignment
4564@cindex input section alignment
4565You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4566SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4567sections, whether larger or smaller.
4568
0c71d759
NC
4569@node Output Section Constraint
4570@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4571@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4572@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4573@cindex constraints on output sections
4574You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4575of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4576read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4577@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4578
252b5132 4579@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4580@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4581@kindex >@var{region}
4582@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4583@cindex memory regions and sections
4584You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4585using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4586
4587Here is a simple example:
4588@smallexample
4589@group
4590MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4591SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4592@end group
4593@end smallexample
4594
4595@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4596@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4597@kindex :@var{phdr}
4598@cindex section, assigning to program header
4599@cindex program headers and sections
4600You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4601using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4602one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4603assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4604@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4605linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4606
4607Here is a simple example:
4608@smallexample
4609@group
4610PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4611SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4612@end group
4613@end smallexample
4614
4615@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4616@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4617@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4618@cindex section fill pattern
4619@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4620You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4621@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4622(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4623within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4624alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4625necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4626of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4627an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4628fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4629other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4630pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4631expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4632
4633You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4634output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4635
4636Here is a simple example:
4637@smallexample
4638@group
563e308f 4639SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4640@end group
4641@end smallexample
4642
4643@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4644@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4645@kindex OVERLAY
4646@cindex overlays
4647An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4648are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4649the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4650copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4651required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4652can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4653than another.
4654
4655Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4656@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4657output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4658command is as follows:
4659@smallexample
4660@group
4661OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4662 @{
4663 @var{secname1}
4664 @{
4665 @var{output-section-command}
4666 @var{output-section-command}
4667 @dots{}
4668 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4669 @var{secname2}
4670 @{
4671 @var{output-section-command}
4672 @var{output-section-command}
4673 @dots{}
4674 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4675 @dots{}
4676 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4677@end group
4678@end smallexample
4679
4680Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4681section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4682section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4683those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4684except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4685sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4686
4687The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4688addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4689memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4690whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4691and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4692and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4693
56dd11f0
NC
4694If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4695references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4696the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4697sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4698@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4699
4700For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4701provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4702defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4703@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4704the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4705within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4706symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4707
4708At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4709the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4710
4711Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4712@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4713@smallexample
4714@group
4715 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4716 @{
4717 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4718 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4719 @}
4720@end group
4721@end smallexample
4722@noindent
4723This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4724address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4725@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4726following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4727@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4728@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4729
4730C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4731like the following.
4732
4733@smallexample
4734@group
4735 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4736 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4737 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4738@end group
4739@end smallexample
4740
4741Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4742everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4743example could have been written identically as follows.
4744
4745@smallexample
4746@group
4747 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4748 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4749 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4750 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4751 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4752 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4753 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4754@end group
4755@end smallexample
4756
4757@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4758@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4759@kindex MEMORY
4760@cindex memory regions
4761@cindex regions of memory
4762@cindex allocating memory
4763@cindex discontinuous memory
4764The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4765memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4766
4767The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4768memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4769may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4770can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4771set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4772regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4773around to fit into the available regions.
4774
4775A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4776command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4777you wish. The syntax is:
4778@smallexample
4779@group
a1ab1d2a 4780MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4781 @{
4782 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4783 @dots{}
4784 @}
4785@end group
4786@end smallexample
4787
4788The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4789region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4790Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4791with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4792must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4793add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 4794command.
252b5132
RH
4795
4796@cindex memory region attributes
4797The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4798whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4799not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4800@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4801section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4802the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4803them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4804
4805The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4806@table @samp
4807@item R
4808Read-only section
4809@item W
4810Read/write section
4811@item X
4812Executable section
4813@item A
4814Allocatable section
4815@item I
4816Initialized section
4817@item L
4818Same as @samp{I}
4819@item !
c09e9a8c 4820Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4821@end table
4822
4823If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4824@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4825attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4826in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4827attributes.
4828
4829@kindex ORIGIN =
4830@kindex o =
4831@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4832The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4833the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4834cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4835abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4836@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4837
4838@kindex LENGTH =
4839@kindex len =
4840@kindex l =
4841The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4842region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4843be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4844@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4845
4846In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4847available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4848and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4849linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4850is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4851or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4852explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4853region.
4854
4855@smallexample
4856@group
a1ab1d2a 4857MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4858 @{
4859 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4860 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4861 @}
4862@end group
4863@end smallexample
4864
4865Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4866specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4867@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4868a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4869output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4870was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4871the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4872output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4873region, the linker will issue an error message.
4874
3ec57632 4875It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4876expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4877@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4878
4879@smallexample
4880@group
c0065db7 4881 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4882@end group
4883@end smallexample
4884
252b5132
RH
4885@node PHDRS
4886@section PHDRS Command
4887@kindex PHDRS
4888@cindex program headers
4889@cindex ELF program headers
4890@cindex program segments
4891@cindex segments, ELF
4892The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4893@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4894loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4895program with the @samp{-p} option.
4896
4897When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4898reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4899program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4900This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4901interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4902
4903The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4904in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4905precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4906the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4907not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4908
4909The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4910generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4911ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4912
4913This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4914@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4915
4916@smallexample
4917@group
4918PHDRS
4919@{
4920 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4921 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4922@}
4923@end group
4924@end smallexample
4925
4926The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4927of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4928header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4929with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4930must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4931is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4932
4933Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4934system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4935specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4936sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4937attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4938Section Phdr}.
4939
4940It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4941merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4942repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4943contain the section.
4944
4945If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4946then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4947not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4948convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4949placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4950default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4951segment at all.
4952
4953@kindex FILEHDR
4954@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 4955You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
4956the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4957The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4958file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 4959include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
4960segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4961these keywords.
252b5132
RH
4962
4963The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4964value of the keyword.
4965
4966@table @asis
4967@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4968Indicates an unused program header.
4969
4970@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4971Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4972the file.
4973
4974@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4975Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4976
4977@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4978Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4979found.
4980
4981@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4982Indicates a segment holding note information.
4983
4984@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4985A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4986ABI.
4987
4988@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4989Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4990
4991@item @var{expression}
4992An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4993be used for types not defined above.
4994@end table
4995
4996You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4997in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4998@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4999Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5000output section attribute.
5001
5002The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5003which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5004explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5005an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5006header.
5007
5008Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5009headers used on a native ELF system.
5010
5011@example
5012@group
5013PHDRS
5014@{
5015 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5016 interp PT_INTERP ;
5017 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5018 data PT_LOAD ;
5019 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5020@}
5021
5022SECTIONS
5023@{
5024 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5025 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5026 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5027 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5028 @dots{}
5029 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5030 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5031 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5032 @dots{}
5033@}
5034@end group
5035@end example
5036
5037@node VERSION
5038@section VERSION Command
5039@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5040@cindex symbol versions
5041@cindex version script
5042@cindex versions of symbols
5043The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5044only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5045symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5046a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5047shared library.
5048
5049You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5050you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5051also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5052
5053The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5054@smallexample
5055VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5056@end smallexample
5057
5058The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5059Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5060version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5061version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5062version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5063scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5064library.
5065
5066The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5067examples.
5068
5069@smallexample
5070VERS_1.1 @{
5071 global:
5072 foo1;
5073 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5074 old*;
5075 original*;
5076 new*;
252b5132
RH
5077@};
5078
5079VERS_1.2 @{
5080 foo2;
5081@} VERS_1.1;
5082
5083VERS_2.0 @{
5084 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5085 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5086 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5087 "f(int, double)";
5088 @};
252b5132
RH
5089@} VERS_1.2;
5090@end smallexample
5091
5092This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5093version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5094The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5095a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5096of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5097symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5098is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5099in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5100However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5101name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5102
5103Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5104depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5105to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5106
5107Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5108depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5109and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5110
5111When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5112specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5113unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5114unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5115somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5116wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5117wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5118set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5119ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5120
5121The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5122they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5123could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5124However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5125
0f6bf451 5126Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5127in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5128symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5129won't.
5130
5131@smallexample
7c9c73be 5132@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5133@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5134
252b5132
RH
5135When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5136symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5137requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5138shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5139loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5140linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5141application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5142way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5143all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5144search for each symbol reference.
5145
5146The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5147doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5148that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5149functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5150the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5151required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5152that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5153versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5154the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5155
5156There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5157first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5158source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5159script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5160maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5161@smallexample
5162__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5163@end smallexample
5164@noindent
5165in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5166be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5167The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5168@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5169takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5170
5171The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5172function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5173an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5174version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5175linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5176
5177To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5178source file. Here is an example:
5179
5180@smallexample
5181__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5182__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5183__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5184__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5185@end smallexample
5186
5187In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5188unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5189example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5190@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5191
5192When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5193some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5194this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5195@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5196declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5197you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5198
5199If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5200within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5201(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5202specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5203
cb840a31
L
5204You can also specify the language in the version script:
5205
5206@smallexample
5207VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5208@end smallexample
5209
c0065db7 5210The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5211The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5212demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5213patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5214@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5215
86043bbb
MM
5216Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5217described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5218or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5219the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5220whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5221cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5222might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5223should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5224expect when you upgrade.
5225
252b5132
RH
5226@node Expressions
5227@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5228@cindex expressions
5229@cindex arithmetic
5230The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5231that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5232expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5233host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5234
5235You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5236
5237The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5238expressions.
5239
5240@menu
5241* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5242* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5243* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5244* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5245* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5246* Operators:: Operators
5247* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5248* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5249* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5250@end menu
5251
5252@node Constants
5253@subsection Constants
5254@cindex integer notation
5255@cindex constants in linker scripts
5256All constants are integers.
5257
5258As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5259octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5260hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5261@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5262@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5263value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5264
5265@cindex scaled integers
5266@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5267@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5268@cindex suffixes for integers
5269@cindex integer suffixes
5270In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5271constant by
5272@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5273@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5274@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5275@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5276@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5277@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5278@tex
5279${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5280@end tex
5281@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5282respectively. For example, the following
5283all refer to the same quantity:
5284
252b5132 5285@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5286_fourk_1 = 4K;
5287_fourk_2 = 4096;
5288_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5289_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5290@end smallexample
5291
8a308ae8
NC
5292Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5293conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5294
0c71d759
NC
5295@node Symbolic Constants
5296@subsection Symbolic Constants
5297@cindex symbolic constants
5298@kindex CONSTANT
5299It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5300the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5301
5302@table @code
5303@item MAXPAGESIZE
5304@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5305The target's maximum page size.
5306
5307@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5308@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5309The target's default page size.
5310@end table
5311
5312So for example:
5313
5314@smallexample
9d5777a3 5315 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5316@end smallexample
5317
5318will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5319supported by the target.
5320
252b5132
RH
5321@node Symbols
5322@subsection Symbol Names
5323@cindex symbol names
5324@cindex names
5325@cindex quoted symbol names
5326@kindex "
5327Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5328and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5329Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5330specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5331keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5332@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5333"SECTION" = 9;
5334"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5335@end smallexample
5336
5337Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5338to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5339whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5340
ecca9871
L
5341@node Orphan Sections
5342@subsection Orphan Sections
5343@cindex orphan
5344Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5345are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5346script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5347output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5348placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5349attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5350same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5351If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5352at the end of the file.
5353
5354For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5355well as section flag.
5356
41911f68 5357If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5358the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5359__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5360section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5361orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5362representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5363character.
5364
252b5132
RH
5365@node Location Counter
5366@subsection The Location Counter
5367@kindex .
5368@cindex dot
5369@cindex location counter
5370@cindex current output location
5371The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5372current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5373location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5374within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5375anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5376
5377@cindex holes
5378Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5379moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5380location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5381and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5382doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5383
5384@smallexample
5385SECTIONS
5386@{
5387 output :
5388 @{
5389 file1(.text)
5390 . = . + 1000;
5391 file2(.text)
5392 . += 1000;
5393 file3(.text)
563e308f 5394 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5395@}
5396@end smallexample
5397@noindent
5398In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5399located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5400followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5401@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5402@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5403specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5404
5c6bbab8
NC
5405@cindex dot inside sections
5406Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5407current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5408statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5409absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5410however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5411not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5412
5413@smallexample
5414SECTIONS
5415@{
5416 . = 0x100
5417 .text: @{
5418 *(.text)
5419 . = 0x200
5420 @}
5421 . = 0x500
5422 .data: @{
5423 *(.data)
5424 . += 0x600
5425 @}
5426@}
5427@end smallexample
5428
5429The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5430and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5431the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5432much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5433move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5434and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5435the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5436the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5437
b5666f2f
AM
5438@cindex dot outside sections
5439Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5440output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5441needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5442
5443@smallexample
5444SECTIONS
5445@{
5446 start_of_text = . ;
5447 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5448 end_of_text = . ;
5449
5450 start_of_data = . ;
5451 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5452 end_of_data = . ;
5453@}
5454@end smallexample
5455
5456If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5457not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5458between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5459should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5460blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5461the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5462sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5463statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5464special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5465place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5466as follows:
5467
5468@smallexample
5469SECTIONS
5470@{
5471 start_of_text = . ;
5472 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5473 end_of_text = . ;
5474
5475 start_of_data = . ;
5476 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5477 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5478 end_of_data = . ;
5479@}
5480@end smallexample
5481
5482This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5483@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5484placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5485assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5486a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5487section. So you could write:
5488
5489@smallexample
5490SECTIONS
5491@{
5492 start_of_text = . ;
5493 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5494 end_of_text = . ;
5495
5496 . = . ;
5497 start_of_data = . ;
5498 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5499 end_of_data = . ;
5500@}
5501@end smallexample
5502
5503Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5504@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5505
252b5132
RH
5506@need 2000
5507@node Operators
5508@subsection Operators
5509@cindex operators for arithmetic
5510@cindex arithmetic operators
5511@cindex precedence in expressions
5512The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5513the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5514@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5515@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5516@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5517@smallexample
5518precedence associativity Operators Notes
5519(highest)
55201 left ! - ~ (1)
55212 left * / %
55223 left + -
55234 left >> <<
55245 left == != > < <= >=
55256 left &
55267 left |
55278 left &&
55289 left ||
552910 right ? :
553011 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5531(lowest)
5532@end smallexample
5533Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5534(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5535(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5536@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5537@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5538@tex
5539\vskip \baselineskip
5540%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5541\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5542\hrule
5543\halign
5544{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5545height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5546&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5547height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5548\noalign{\hrule}
5549height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5550&highest&&&&&\cr
5551% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5552&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5553&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5554&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5555&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5556&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5557&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5558&7&&left&&|&\cr
5559&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5560&9&&left&&||&\cr
5561&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5562&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5563&lowest&&&&&\cr
5564height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5565\hrule}
5566@end tex
5567@iftex
5568{
5569@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5570@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5571@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5572}
5573@end iftex
5574@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5575
5576@node Evaluation
5577@subsection Evaluation
5578@cindex lazy evaluation
5579@cindex expression evaluation order
5580The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5581an expression when absolutely necessary.
5582
5583The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5584address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5585regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5586as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5587
5588However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5589until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5590other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5591for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5592
5593The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5594assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5595allocation.
5596
5597Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5598@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5599
5600If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5601available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5602following
5603@smallexample
5604@group
5605SECTIONS
5606 @{
a1ab1d2a 5607 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5608 @{ *(.text) @}
5609 @}
5610@end group
5611@end smallexample
5612@noindent
5613will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5614address}.
5615
5616@node Expression Section
5617@subsection The Section of an Expression
5618@cindex expression sections
5619@cindex absolute expressions
5620@cindex relative expressions
5621@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5622@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5623@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5624Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5625relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5626using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5627value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5628symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5629operations.
5630
abf4be64
AM
5631Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5632section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5633address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5634@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5635functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5636One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5637(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5638differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5639versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5640section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5641Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5642absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5643given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5644everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5645
5646In the following simple example,
252b5132 5647
7542af2a
AM
5648@smallexample
5649@group
5650SECTIONS
5651 @{
5652 . = 0x100;
5653 __executable_start = 0x100;
5654 .data :
5655 @{
5656 . = 0x10;
5657 __data_start = 0x10;
5658 *(.data)
5659 @}
5660 @dots{}
5661 @}
5662@end group
5663@end smallexample
252b5132 5664
7542af2a
AM
5665both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5666address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5667@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5668section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5669
5c3049d2
AM
5670For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5671addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5672
5673@itemize @bullet
5674@item
c05f749e
AM
5675Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5676operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5677absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5678@item
7542af2a
AM
5679Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5680relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5681and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5682@item
c05f749e
AM
5683Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5684in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5685address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5686before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5687@end itemize
5688
5689The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5690
5691@itemize @bullet
5692@item
5693An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5694@item
5695The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5696@item
9bc8bb33 5697The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5698relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5699(after above conversions) is also a number.
5700@item
5701The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5702relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5703section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5704@item
5705The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5706conversions) is an absolute address.
5707@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5708
5709You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5710to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5711create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5712section @samp{.data}:
5713@smallexample
5714SECTIONS
5715 @{
5716 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5717 @}
5718@end smallexample
5719@noindent
5720If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5721@samp{.data} section.
5722
7542af2a
AM
5723Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5724particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5725
252b5132
RH
5726@node Builtin Functions
5727@subsection Builtin Functions
5728@cindex functions in expressions
5729The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5730use in linker script expressions.
5731
5732@table @code
5733@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5734@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5735@cindex expression, absolute
5736Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5737of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5738value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5739normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5740
5741@item ADDR(@var{section})
5742@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5743@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5744Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5745script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5746the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5747@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5748@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5749the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5750@smallexample
5751@group
5752SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5753 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5754 @{
252b5132
RH
5755 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5756 @dots{}
5757 @}
5758 .output :
5759 @{
5760 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5761 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5762 @}
5763@dots{} @}
5764@end group
5765@end smallexample
5766
876f4090
NS
5767@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5768@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5769@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5770@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5771@cindex round up location counter
5772@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5773@cindex round up expression
5774@cindex align expression
5775Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5776to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5777doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5778arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5779expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5780equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5781
5782Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5783next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5784variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5785input sections:
252b5132
RH
5786@smallexample
5787@group
5788SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5789 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5790 *(.data)
5791 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5792 @}
5793@dots{} @}
5794@end group
5795@end smallexample
5796@noindent
5797The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5798a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5799a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5800of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5801
5802The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5803
362c1d1a
NS
5804@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5805@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5806@cindex section alignment
5807Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5808been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5809evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5810the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5811value in that section.
5812@smallexample
5813@group
5814SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5815 .output @{
5816 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5817 @dots{}
5818 @}
5819@dots{} @}
5820@end group
5821@end smallexample
5822
252b5132
RH
5823@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5824@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5825This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5826scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5827section.
5828
2d20f7bf
JJ
5829@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5830@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5831This is equivalent to either
5832@smallexample
5833(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5834@end smallexample
5835or
5836@smallexample
5837(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5838@end smallexample
5839@noindent
5840depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5841for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5842@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5843If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5844memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5845bytes in the on-disk file.
5846
5847This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5848any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5849@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5850be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5851working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5852
5853@noindent
5854Example:
5855@smallexample
5856 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5857@end smallexample
5858
5859@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5860@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5861This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5862evaluation purposes.
5863
5864@smallexample
5865 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5866@end smallexample
5867
a4f5ad88
JJ
5868@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5869@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5870This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5871@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5872When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5873does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5874@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5875boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5876it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5877@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5878
5879@smallexample
5880 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5881@end smallexample
5882
252b5132
RH
5883@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5884@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5885@cindex symbol defaults
5886Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5887defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5888return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5889default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5890shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5891the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5892existed, its value is preserved:
5893
5894@smallexample
5895@group
5896SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5897 .text : @{
5898 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5899 @dots{}
5900 @}
5901 @dots{}
5902@}
5903@end group
5904@end smallexample
5905
3ec57632
NC
5906@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5907@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5908Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5909
252b5132
RH
5910@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5911@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5912@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5913Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5914Section LMA}).
5915
5916@kindex MAX
5917@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5918Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5919
5920@kindex MIN
5921@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5922Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5923
5924@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5925@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5926@cindex unallocated address, next
5927Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5928This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5929use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5930output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5931
3ec57632
NC
5932@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5933@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5934Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5935
ba916c8a
MM
5936@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5937@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5938Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
5939value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
5940@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
5941will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
5942can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 5943``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
5944name.
5945
252b5132
RH
5946@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5947@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5948@cindex section size
5949Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5950been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5951evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5952@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5953@smallexample
5954@group
5955SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5956 .output @{
5957 .start = . ;
5958 @dots{}
5959 .end = . ;
5960 @}
5961 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5962 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5963@dots{} @}
5964@end group
5965@end smallexample
5966
5967@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5968@itemx sizeof_headers
5969@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5970@cindex header size
5971Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5972information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5973this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5974choose, to facilitate paging.
5975
5976@cindex not enough room for program headers
5977@cindex program headers, not enough room
5978When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5979@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5980number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5981addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5982additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5983room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5984the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5985script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5986you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5987command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5988@end table
5989
5990@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5991@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5992@cindex implicit linker scripts
5993If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5994an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5995linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5996linker will report an error.
5997
5998An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5999
6000Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6001assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6002commands.
6003
6004Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6005at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6006read. This can affect archive searching.
6007
6008@ifset GENERIC
6009@node Machine Dependent
6010@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6011
6012@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6013@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6014sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6015functionality are not listed.
6016
6017@menu
36f63dca
NC
6018@ifset H8300
6019* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6020@end ifset
6021@ifset I960
6022* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6023@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6024@ifset M68HC11
6025* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6026@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6027@ifset ARM
6028* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6029@end ifset
6030@ifset HPPA
6031* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6032@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6033@ifset M68K
6034* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6035@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6036@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6037* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6038@end ifset
2469cfa2 6039@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6040* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6041@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6042@ifset POWERPC
6043* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6044@end ifset
6045@ifset POWERPC64
6046* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6047@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6048@ifset SPU
6049* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6050@end ifset
74459f0e 6051@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6052* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6053@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6054@ifset WIN32
6055* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6056@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6057@ifset XTENSA
6058* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6059@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6060@end menu
6061@end ifset
6062
252b5132
RH
6063@ifset H8300
6064@ifclear GENERIC
6065@raisesections
6066@end ifclear
6067
6068@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6069@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6070
6071@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6072For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6073you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6074
6075@table @emph
6076@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6077@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6078@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6079targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6080program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6081respectively.
6082
6083@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6084@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6085@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6086@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6087sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6088page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6089(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6090@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6091top page of memory).
1502569c 6092
81f5558e
NC
6093@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6094indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6095displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6096the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6097@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6098whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6099range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6100
1502569c 6101@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6102@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6103biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6104which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6105page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6106(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6107@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6108the top page of memory).
6109
6110@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6111@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
611232 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6113changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6114(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6115@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6116the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6117@end table
6118
6119@ifclear GENERIC
6120@lowersections
6121@end ifclear
6122@end ifset
6123
36f63dca 6124@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6125@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6126@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6127@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6128@node Renesas
6129@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6130
c2dcd04e
NC
6131@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6132H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6133options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6134@end ifset
6135@end ifclear
6136
6137@ifset I960
6138@ifclear GENERIC
6139@raisesections
6140@end ifclear
6141
6142@node i960
6143@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6144
6145@cindex i960 support
6146
6147You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6148specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6149family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6150incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6151linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6152libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6153search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6154
6155For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6156well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6157paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6158the names
6159
6160@smallexample
6161@group
6162try
6163libtry.a
6164tryca
6165libtryca.a
6166@end group
6167@end smallexample
6168
6169@noindent
6170The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6171two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6172
6173You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6174the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6175use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6176specifies a library.
6177
6178@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6179@cindex relaxing on i960
6180@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6181you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6182@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6183them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6184instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6185instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6186target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6187not itself call any subroutines).
6188
48229727
JB
6189@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6190@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6191@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6192The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6193
6194The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6195
85fdf906
AH
6196@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6197@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6198The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6199
36f63dca
NC
6200@ifclear GENERIC
6201@lowersections
6202@end ifclear
6203@end ifset
6204
6205@ifset ARM
6206@ifclear GENERIC
6207@raisesections
6208@end ifclear
6209
93fd0973
SC
6210@ifset M68HC11
6211@ifclear GENERIC
6212@raisesections
6213@end ifclear
6214
6215@node M68HC11/68HC12
6216@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6217
6218@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6219
6220@subsection Linker Relaxation
6221
6222For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6223optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6224
6225@table @emph
6226@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6227@item relaxing address modes
6228@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6229targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6230program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6231respectively.
6232
6233@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6234transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6235page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6236
6237@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6238When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6239of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6240addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6241@code{bset} instructions.
6242
6243@end table
6244
6245@subsection Trampoline Generation
6246
6247@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6248@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6249For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6250call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6251will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6252trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6253case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6254point to the function trampoline.
6255
6256@ifclear GENERIC
6257@lowersections
6258@end ifclear
6259@end ifset
6260
36f63dca 6261@node ARM
3674e28a 6262@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6263
6264@cindex ARM interworking support
6265@kindex --support-old-code
6266For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6267between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6268been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6269line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6270libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6271option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6272given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6273which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6274the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6275non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6276
6277@cindex thumb entry point
6278@cindex entry point, thumb
6279@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6280The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6281@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6282But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6283branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6284executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6285
ce11ba6c
KT
6286@cindex PE import table prefixing
6287@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6288The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6289the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6290element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6291import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6292
e489d0ae
PB
6293@cindex BE8
6294@kindex --be8
6295The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6296executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6297The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6298
3674e28a
PB
6299@cindex TARGET1
6300@kindex --target1-rel
6301@kindex --target1-abs
6302The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6303@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6304or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6305and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6306
6307@cindex TARGET2
6308@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6309The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6310@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6311meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6312@table @samp
6313@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6314@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6315@item abs
6316@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6317@item got-rel
6318@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6319@end table
6320
319850b4
JB
6321@cindex FIX_V4BX
6322@kindex --fix-v4bx
6323The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6324specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6325interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6326also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6327
6328In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6329linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6330@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6331
6332In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6333relocations are ignored.
6334
845b51d6
PB
6335@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6336@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6337Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6338relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6339
6340@smallexample
6341TST rM, #1
6342MOVEQ PC, rM
6343BX Rn
6344@end smallexample
6345
6346This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6347and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6348condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6349
33bfe774
JB
6350@cindex USE_BLX
6351@kindex --use-blx
6352The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6353BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6354situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6355code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6356each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6357
6358This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6359specify it if you are using that target.
6360
c6dd86c6
JB
6361@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6362@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6363The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6364bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6365instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6366to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6367the support code can read the intended values.
6368
6369The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6370intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6371and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6372intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6373full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6374you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6375
6376If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6377enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6378@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6379mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6380vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6381@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6382
6383If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6384potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6385such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6386first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6387instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6388the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6389are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6390
2de70689
MGD
6391@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6392@kindex --fix-arm1176
6393@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6394The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6395in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6396are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6397unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6398
9d5777a3 6399Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6400Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6401http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6402
bf21ed78
MS
6403@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6404@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6405The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6406warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6407enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6408linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6409using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6410not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6411
6412@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6413@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6414The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6415warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6416@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6417linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6418using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6419
726150b7
NC
6420@cindex PIC_VENEER
6421@kindex --pic-veneer
6422The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6423ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6424is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6425@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6426
6427@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6428@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6429The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6430code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6431perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6432placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6433controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6434The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6435duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6436group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6437code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6438where they should be placed.
6439
6440The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6441@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6442placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6443branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6444placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6445value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6446exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6447A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6448linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6449from the input sections.
6450
6451The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6452@samp{N = +1}.
6453
1a51c1a4
NC
6454Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6455only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6456otherwise.
6457
36f63dca
NC
6458@ifclear GENERIC
6459@lowersections
6460@end ifclear
6461@end ifset
6462
6463@ifset HPPA
6464@ifclear GENERIC
6465@raisesections
6466@end ifclear
6467
6468@node HPPA ELF32
6469@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6470@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6471@kindex --multi-subspace
6472When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6473import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6474The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6475stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6476multiple sub-spaces.
6477
6478@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6479@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6480Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6481stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6482@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6483sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6484a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6485the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6486conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6487prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6488A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6489branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6490@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6491@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6492detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6493positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6494
6495Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6496single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6497create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6498large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6499
6500@ifclear GENERIC
6501@lowersections
6502@end ifclear
6503@end ifset
6504
7fb9f789
NC
6505@ifset M68K
6506@ifclear GENERIC
6507@raisesections
6508@end ifclear
6509
6510@node M68K
6511@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6512
6513@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6514@kindex --got=@var{type}
6515The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6516The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6517@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6518the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6519@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6520entries only at non-negative offsets.
6521@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6522entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6523support such GOTs.
6524@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6525output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6526file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6527files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6528
6529@ifclear GENERIC
6530@lowersections
6531@end ifclear
6532@end ifset
6533
36f63dca
NC
6534@ifset MMIX
6535@ifclear GENERIC
6536@raisesections
6537@end ifclear
6538
6539@node MMIX
6540@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6541For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6542@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6543understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6544can translate between the two formats.
6545
6546There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6547Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6548registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6549equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6550@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6551global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6552this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6553symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6554
7a2de473
HPN
6555Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6556@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6557The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6558of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6559
6560Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6561are left out from an mmo file.
6562
6563@ifclear GENERIC
6564@lowersections
6565@end ifclear
6566@end ifset
6567
6568@ifset MSP430
6569@ifclear GENERIC
6570@raisesections
6571@end ifclear
6572
6573@node MSP430
6574@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6575For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6576will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6577just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6578
6579@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6580The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6581
6582@table @code
6583@item @samp{.vectors}
6584Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6585
6586@item @samp{.bootloader}
6587Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6588in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6589
6590@item @samp{.infomem}
6591Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6592this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6593
c0065db7 6594@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6595This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6596in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6597
6598@item @samp{.noinit}
6599Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6600
c0065db7 6601The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6602@end table
6603
6604@ifclear GENERIC
6605@lowersections
6606@end ifclear
6607@end ifset
6608
2a60a7a8
AM
6609@ifset POWERPC
6610@ifclear GENERIC
6611@raisesections
6612@end ifclear
6613
6614@node PowerPC ELF32
6615@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6616@cindex PowerPC long branches
6617@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6618Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6619displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6620@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6621@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6622the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6623section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6624section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6625@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6626both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6627considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6628
6629@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6630@table @option
6631@cindex PowerPC PLT
6632@kindex --bss-plt
6633@item --bss-plt
6634Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6635generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6636the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6637writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6638@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6639PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6640compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6641BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6642
016687f8
AM
6643@kindex --secure-plt
6644@item --secure-plt
6645@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6646@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6647when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6648layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6649style BSS PLT.
6650
2a60a7a8
AM
6651@cindex PowerPC GOT
6652@kindex --sdata-got
6653@item --sdata-got
6654The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6655sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6656@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6657section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6658@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6659@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6660@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6661@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6662PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6663pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6664GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6665really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6666
6667@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6668@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6669@item --emit-stub-syms
6670This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6671symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6672
6673@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6674@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6675@item --no-tls-optimize
6676PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6677sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6678disable the optimization.
6679@end table
6680
6681@ifclear GENERIC
6682@lowersections
6683@end ifclear
6684@end ifset
6685
6686@ifset POWERPC64
6687@ifclear GENERIC
6688@raisesections
6689@end ifclear
6690
6691@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6692@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6693
6694@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6695@table @option
6696@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6697@kindex --stub-group-size
6698@item --stub-group-size
6699Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6700by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6701@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6702sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6703a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6704the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6705conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6706prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6707A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6708branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6709@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6710@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6711detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6712positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6713
6714Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6715single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6716create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6717large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6718
6719@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6720@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6721@item --emit-stub-syms
6722This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6723symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6724
6725@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6726@kindex --dotsyms
6727@kindex --no-dotsyms
6728@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6729These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6730in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6731function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6732code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6733properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6734to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6735@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6736dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6737feature.
6738
6739@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6740@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6741@item --no-tls-optimize
6742PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6743sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6744disable the optimization.
6745
6746@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6747@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6748@item --no-opd-optimize
6749PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6750corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6751the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6752Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6753
6754@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6755@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6756@item --non-overlapping-opd
6757Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6758@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6759the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6760entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6761
6762@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6763@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6764@item --no-toc-optimize
6765PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6766entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6767reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6768marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6769marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6770relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6771unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6772reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6773discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6774reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6775code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6776optimization.
6777
6778@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6779@kindex --no-multi-toc
6780@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
6781If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
6782@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
6783where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
6784entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6785total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6786grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6787TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6788calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6789help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
679064K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6791Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
6792
6793@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
6794@kindex --no-toc-sort
6795@item --no-toc-sort
6796By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
6797happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
6798placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
6799with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
6800referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
6801@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
6802results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
6803off this feature.
6804
6805@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
6806@kindex --plt-align
6807@kindex --no-plt-align
6808@item --plt-align
6809@itemx --no-plt-align
6810Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
6811aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
6812boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
6813are packed tightly.
6814
6815@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
6816@kindex --plt-static-chain
6817@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
6818@item --plt-static-chain
6819@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
6820Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
6821chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
6822chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
6823
6824@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
6825@kindex --plt-thread-safe
6826@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
6827@item --plt-thread-safe
6828@itemx --no-thread-safe
6829With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
6830lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
6831another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
6832order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
6833memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
6834barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
6835looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
6836seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
6837default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
6838@end table
6839
6840@ifclear GENERIC
6841@lowersections
6842@end ifclear
6843@end ifset
6844
49fa1e15
AM
6845@ifset SPU
6846@ifclear GENERIC
6847@raisesections
6848@end ifclear
6849
6850@node SPU ELF
6851@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6852
6853@cindex SPU ELF options
6854@table @option
6855
6856@cindex SPU plugins
6857@kindex --plugin
6858@item --plugin
6859This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6860
6861@cindex SPU overlays
6862@kindex --no-overlays
6863@item --no-overlays
6864Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6865regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6866@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6867turns off all this special overlay handling.
6868
6869@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6870@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6871@item --emit-stub-syms
6872This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6873symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6874
6875@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6876@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6877@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6878This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6879function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6880on calls to non-overlay regions.
6881
6882@cindex SPU local store size
6883@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6884@item --local-store=lo:hi
6885@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6886the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6887range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6888
c0065db7 6889@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6890@kindex --stack-analysis
6891@item --stack-analysis
6892SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6893unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6894under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6895@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6896@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6897determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6898for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6899for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6900for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6901find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6902and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6903under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6904dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6905is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6906and calls will be given.
6907
c0065db7 6908@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6909@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6910@item --emit-stack-syms
6911This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6912in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6913These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6914functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6915functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6916such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6917The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6918@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6919@end table
6920
6921@ifclear GENERIC
6922@lowersections
6923@end ifclear
6924@end ifset
6925
36f63dca
NC
6926@ifset TICOFF
6927@ifclear GENERIC
6928@raisesections
6929@end ifclear
6930
6931@node TI COFF
6932@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6933@cindex TI COFF versions
6934@kindex --format=@var{version}
6935The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6936TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6937also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6938format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6939header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6940
6941@ifclear GENERIC
6942@lowersections
6943@end ifclear
6944@end ifset
6945
2ca22b03
NC
6946@ifset WIN32
6947@ifclear GENERIC
6948@raisesections
6949@end ifclear
6950
6951@node WIN32
6952@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6953
c0065db7 6954This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6955See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6956command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6957
6958@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6959@cindex import libraries
6960@item import libraries
69da35b5 6961The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6962libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6963regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6964archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6965support for creating such libraries provided with the
6966@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6967
c0065db7
RM
6968@item exporting DLL symbols
6969@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6970The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6971
6972@table @emph
6973@item using auto-export functionality
6974@cindex using auto-export functionality
6975By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6976which is controlled by the following command line options:
6977
0a5d968e
NC
6978@itemize
6979@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6980@item --exclude-symbols
6981@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6982@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 6983@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
6984@end itemize
6985
09e2aba4
DK
6986When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6987(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6988symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6989often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6990private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 6991options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
6992exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6993final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6994
6995If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6996command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6997if either of the following are true:
6998
6999@itemize
7000@item A DEF file is used.
7001@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7002@end itemize
dc8465bf 7003
c0065db7
RM
7004@item using a DEF file
7005@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7006Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7007an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7008exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7009name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7010command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7011
7012@example
7013gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7014@end example
7015
0a5d968e
NC
7016Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7017@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7018
dc8465bf
NC
7019Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7020
7021@example
4b5bd4e7 7022LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7023
7024EXPORTS
7025foo
7026bar
7027_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7028another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7029var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7030doo = foo == foo2
7031eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7032@end example
dc8465bf 7033
7fcab871 7034This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7035symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7036alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7037by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7038@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7039@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7040export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7041in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7042symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7043
6b31ad16
DS
7044The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7045name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7046the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7047
b45619c0
NC
7048When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7049library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7050@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7051executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7052
7053With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7054specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7055non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7056
7057If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7058or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7059filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7060
4b5bd4e7
DS
7061The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7062
7063@example
7064EXPORTS
7065 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7066 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7067 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7068@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7069
7070Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7071@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7072@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7073@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7074Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7075@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7076string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7077
7078The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7079
7080@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7081will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7082by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7083linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7084library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7085
7086@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7087The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7088the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7089@code{*_imp__foo}).
7090
7091@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7092well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7093read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7094variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7095the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7096extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7097application will behave unexpectedly.
7098
7099@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7100it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7101symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7102API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7103the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7104
4b5bd4e7
DS
7105See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7106other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7107
7108@cindex creating a DEF file
7109While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7110with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7111
7112@item Using decorations
7113@cindex Using decorations
7114Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7115itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7116declared as:
7117
7118@example
7119__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7120__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7121@end example
7122
7123All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7124any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7125this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7126the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7127
7128Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7129decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7130instead:
7131
7132@example
7133__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7134__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7135@end example
7136
c0065db7
RM
7137This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7138when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7139variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7140code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7141of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7142omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7143@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7144information.
c0065db7 7145@end table
dc8465bf 7146
2ca22b03
NC
7147@cindex automatic data imports
7148@item automatic data imports
7149The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7150by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7151compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7152issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7153code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7154c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7155initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7156decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7157platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7158command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7159The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7160suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7161trigger the feature's use.
7162
c0065db7 7163auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7164additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7165
c0065db7 7166"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7167documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7168
c0065db7
RM
7169The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7170occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7171One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7172below.
7173
7174@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7175For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7176object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7177offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7178field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7179in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7180without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7181The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7182references.
7183
c0065db7
RM
7184The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7185be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7186themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7187runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7188compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7189support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7190run without error on an older system.
7191
c0065db7
RM
7192@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7193enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7194
7195@cindex direct linking to a dll
7196@item direct linking to a dll
7197The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7198including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7199libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7200traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7201libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7202function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7203though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7204storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7205tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7206large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7207
c0065db7 7208Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7209@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7210of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7211perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7212select the dll instead of an import library.
7213
2ca22b03 7214
69da35b5
NC
7215For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7216to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7217
7218@example
45e948fe
NC
7219libxxx.dll.a
7220xxx.dll.a
7221libxxx.a
7222xxx.lib
69da35b5 7223cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7224libxxx.dll
7225xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7226@end example
7227
69da35b5
NC
7228before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7229
c0065db7
RM
7230(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7231where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7232@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7233file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7234@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7235
c0065db7
RM
7236Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7237@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7238was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7239various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7240could coexist on the same machine.
7241
2ca22b03
NC
7242The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7243applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7244libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7245
7246@example
7247bin/
7248 cygxxx.dll
7249lib/
7250 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7251 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7252@end example
7253
c0065db7
RM
7254Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7255done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7256
72571. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7258@example
7259gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7260@end example
2ca22b03 7261
69da35b5
NC
7262However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7263(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7264@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7265not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7266
2ca22b03
NC
72672. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7268directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7269should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7270making the app/dll.
7271
7272@example
7273ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7274@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7275
7276Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7277
7278@example
7279gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7280@end example
69da35b5
NC
7281
7282This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7283perfectly legal
7284
7285@example
7286bin/
7287 cygxxx-5.dll
7288lib/
c0065db7 7289 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7290@end example
7291
dc8465bf 7292Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7293even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7294@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7295
7296Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7297wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7298
72991. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7300work with auto-imported data.
7301
dc8465bf
NC
73022. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7303import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7304symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7305for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7306possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7307
45e948fe
NC
73083. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7309critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7310in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7311stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7312
69da35b5 7313So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7314true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7315a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7316binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7317massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7318requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7319will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7320
c0065db7 7321@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7322@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7323@item adding additional names
7324Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7325A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7326exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7327when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7328import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7329
c0065db7 7330@example
dc8465bf
NC
7331LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7332
7333EXPORTS
c0065db7 7334foo
dc8465bf 7335_foo = foo
c0065db7 7336@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7337
7338The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7339
7340Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7341source code using the "weak" attribute:
7342
c0065db7
RM
7343@example
7344void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7345void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7346@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7347
7348See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7349symbols.
7350
7351@item renaming symbols
7352Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7353kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7354@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7355DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7356created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7357
c0065db7 7358@example
dc8465bf
NC
7359LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7360
7361EXPORTS
7362_foo = foo
c0065db7 7363@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7364
7365The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7366@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7367@end table
dc8465bf 7368
0a5d968e 7369Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7370unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7371If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7372@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7373that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7374@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7375renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7376to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7377the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7378In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7379which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7380
7381@cindex weak externals
7382@item weak externals
7383The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7384weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7385defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7386are three variants of weak externals:
7387@itemize
7388@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7389called lazy externals.
7390@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7391This form is not presently implemented.
7392@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7393implemented.
7394@end itemize
7395As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7396are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7397uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7398
7399@cindex aligned common symbols
7400@item aligned common symbols
7401As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7402desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7403the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7404carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7405by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7406tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7407but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7408warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7409@end table
7410
7411@ifclear GENERIC
7412@lowersections
7413@end ifclear
7414@end ifset
7415
e0001a05
NC
7416@ifset XTENSA
7417@ifclear GENERIC
7418@raisesections
7419@end ifclear
7420
7421@node Xtensa
7422@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7423
7424@cindex Xtensa processors
7425The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7426@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7427specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7428keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7429example, with the command:
7430
7431@smallexample
7432SECTIONS
7433@{
7434 .text : @{
7435 *(.literal .text)
7436 @}
7437@}
7438@end smallexample
7439
7440@noindent
7441@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7442and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7443literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7444interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7445group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7446files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7447and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7448
43cd72b9 7449@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7450@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7451Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7452provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7453is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7454literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7455will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7456location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7457the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7458unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7459@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7460range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7461
7462For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7463to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7464instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7465instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7466instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7467@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7468hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7469By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7470switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7471density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7472instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7473performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7474linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7475a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7476
7477The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7478control the linker:
7479
7480@cindex Xtensa options
7481@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7482@item --size-opt
7483When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7484more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7485no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7486alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7487preserve the correctness of the code.
7488@end table
e0001a05
NC
7489
7490@ifclear GENERIC
7491@lowersections
7492@end ifclear
7493@end ifset
7494
252b5132
RH
7495@ifclear SingleFormat
7496@node BFD
7497@chapter BFD
7498
7499@cindex back end
7500@cindex object file management
7501@cindex object formats available
7502@kindex objdump -i
7503The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7504These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7505object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7506format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7507it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7508associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7509object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7510(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7511list all the formats available for your configuration.
7512
7513@cindex BFD requirements
7514@cindex requirements for BFD
7515As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7516several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7517BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7518formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7519been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7520BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7521may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7522
7523One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7524mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7525useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7526conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7527
7528@menu
7529* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7530@end menu
7531
7532@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7533@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7534@cindex opening object files
7535@include bfdsumm.texi
7536@end ifclear
7537
7538@node Reporting Bugs
7539@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7540@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7541@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7542
ff5dcc92 7543Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7544
7545Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7546it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7547to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7548work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7549@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7550
7551In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7552information that enables us to fix the bug.
7553
7554@menu
7555* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7556* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7557@end menu
7558
7559@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7560@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7561@cindex bug criteria
7562
7563If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7564
7565@itemize @bullet
7566@cindex fatal signal
7567@cindex linker crash
7568@cindex crash of linker
7569@item
7570If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7571@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7572
7573@cindex error on valid input
7574@item
ff5dcc92 7575If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7576
7577@cindex invalid input
7578@item
ff5dcc92 7579If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7580may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7581object files are correct.
7582
7583@item
7584If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7585improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7586@end itemize
7587
7588@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7589@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7590@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7591@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7592
7593A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7594products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7595recommend you contact that organization first.
7596
7597You can find contact information for many support companies and
7598individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7599distribution.
7600
ad22bfe8 7601@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7602Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7603@value{BUGURL}.
7604@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7605
7606The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7607@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7608fact or leave it out, state it!
7609
7610Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7611problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7612assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7613matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7614the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7615location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7616were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7617into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7618specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7619and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7620
7621Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7622the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7623on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7624
7625Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7626bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7627respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7628You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7629
7630To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7631
7632@itemize @bullet
7633@item
ff5dcc92 7634The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7635the @samp{--version} argument.
7636
7637Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7638the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7639
7640@item
ff5dcc92 7641Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7642patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7643
7644@item
7645The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7646version number.
7647
7648@item
ff5dcc92 7649What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7650``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7651
7652@item
7653The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7654observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7655list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7656sufficient.
7657
7658If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7659and then we might not encounter the bug.
7660
7661@item
7662A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7663bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7664provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7665bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7666state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7667requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7668we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7669attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7670
7671If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7672@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7673object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7674@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7675how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7676
7677@item
7678A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7679incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7680
ff5dcc92 7681Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7682will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7683not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7684a chance to make a mistake.
7685
7686Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7687say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7688copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7689C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7690and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7691fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7692you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7693any conclusion from our observations.
7694
7695@item
ff5dcc92 7696If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7697diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7698@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7699If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7700context, not by line number.
7701
7702The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7703sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7704@end itemize
7705
7706Here are some things that are not necessary:
7707
7708@itemize @bullet
7709@item
7710A description of the envelope of the bug.
7711
7712Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7713which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7714changes will not affect it.
7715
7716This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7717will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7718with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7719We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7720
7721Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7722of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7723output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7724less time, and so on.
7725
7726However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7727report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7728
7729@item
7730A patch for the bug.
7731
7732A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7733the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7734a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7735to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7736
ff5dcc92 7737Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7738construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7739through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7740able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7741fixed.
7742
7743And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7744patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7745help us to understand.
7746
7747@item
7748A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7749
7750Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7751things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7752@end itemize
7753
7754@node MRI
7755@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7756@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7757To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7758linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7759alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7760described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7761simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7762@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7763linker commands; these commands are described here.
7764
7765In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7766file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7767features to make use of them.
7768
7769You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7770@samp{-c} command-line option.
7771
7772Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7773command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7774blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7775MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7776issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7777
7778Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7779
7780You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7781lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7782The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7783
7784@table @code
7785@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7786@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7787@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7788Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7789the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7790@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7791your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7792script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7793commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7794input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7795@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7796
7797@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7798@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7799Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7800in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7801
7802@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7803
7804@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7805@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7806Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7807@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7808
7809@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7810@item BASE @var{expression}
7811Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7812absolute addresses) in the output file.
7813
7814@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7815@item CHIP @var{expression}
7816@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7817This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7818
7819@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7820@item END
7821This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7822
7823@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7824@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7825Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7826language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7827
7828@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7829@item
252b5132
RH
7830S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7831
7832@item
7833IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7834
7835@item
7836COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7837@samp{COFF}
7838@end enumerate
7839
7840@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7841@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7842Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7843@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7844
7845The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7846same line, with no change in its effect.
7847
7848@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7849@item LOAD @var{filename}
7850@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7851Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7852same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7853command line.
7854
7855@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7856@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7857@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7858MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7859option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7860
7861@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7862@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7863@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7864Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7865order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7866script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7867sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7868file, in the order specified.
7869
7870@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7871@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7872@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7873@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7874Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7875@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7876
7877@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7878@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7879@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7880@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7881You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7882specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7883If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7884@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7885@end table
7886
793c5807
NC
7887@node GNU Free Documentation License
7888@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7889@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7890
370b66a1
CD
7891@node LD Index
7892@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7893
7894@printindex cp
7895
7896@tex
7ca01ed9 7897% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
7898% meantime:
7899\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7900\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7901\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7902\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7903\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7904\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7905\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7906\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7907\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 7908% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
7909@end tex
7910
252b5132 7911@bye